JVC Projector DLA G150CLU User Manual

DLA-G150CLU  
DLA-G150CLE  
[ DLA-G150CLU / DLA-G150CLE ]  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
®
PROJECTOR  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS : PROJECTEUR  
INSTRUCTIONS  
DLA-G150CLU  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
W
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
S
VIDEO  
Y/C  
PC1  
PC2  
DVI  
DLA-G150CLU  
T
T
ZOOM  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
W
W
PRESET  
EXIT  
ENTER  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
(Lenses are optional)  
LCT1123-001B  
Mar. 2002 No. 51931  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This product should be operated only with the type of  
power source indicated on the label. If you are not sure  
of the type of power supply to your home, consult your  
product dealer or local power company.  
When connecting other products such as VCR’s, and  
personal computers, you should turn off the power of this  
product for protection against electric shock.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
Do not place combustibles behind the cooling fan. For  
example, cloth, paper, matches, aerosol cans or gas  
lighters that present special hazards when over heated.  
This product is equipped with a three-wire plug. This  
plug will fit only into a grounded power outlet. If you are  
unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your  
electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not defeat the  
safety purpose of the grounded plug.  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS  
Do not look into the projection lens while the illumination  
lamp is turned on. Exposure of your eyes to the strong  
light can result in impaired eyesight.  
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This  
unit has been engineered and manufactured to assure your  
WARNING :  
personal safety. But IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN  
POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD. In  
order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated into this  
product, observe the following basic rules for its installation,  
use and service. Please read these “Important Safeguards”  
carefully before use.  
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO  
NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR  
MOISTURE.  
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not  
likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or  
against them. Pay particular attention to cords at doors,  
plugs, receptacles, and the point where they exit from the  
product.  
Do not look into the inside of this unit through vents  
(ventilation holes), etc. Do not look at the illumination  
lamp directly by opening the cabinet while the  
illumination lamp is turned on. The illumination lamp also  
contains ultraviolet rays and the light is so powerful that  
your eyesight can be impaired.  
For added protection of this product during a lightning  
storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long  
periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and  
disconnect the cable system. This will prevent damage  
to the product due to lightning and power line surges.  
CAUTION :  
All the safety and operating instructions should be read  
before the product is operated.  
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove  
cover.  
Do not drop, hit, or damage the light-source lamp (lamp  
unit) in any way. It may cause the light-source lamp to  
break and lead to injuries. Do not use a damaged light-  
source lamp. If the light-source lamp is broken, ask your  
dealer to repair it. Fragments from a broken light-source  
lamp may cause injures.  
The safety and operating instructions should be retained  
for future reference.  
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.  
All warnings on the product and in the operating  
instructions should be adhered to.  
Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or  
convenience receptacles on other equipment as this can  
result in a risk of fire or electric shock.  
This projector is equipped with a 3-blade grounding-type  
plug to satisfy FCC rule. If you are unable to insert the  
plug into the outlet, contact your electrician.  
All operating instructions should be followed.  
Xenon gas is enclosed with high pressure inside the light-  
source lamp (lamp unit) of this projector. If you drop or  
impart a shock to the lamp, or discard it as is, there is the  
possibility of explosion, leading to personal injury. Use  
special care when handling the lamp. For any unclear  
points, consult your product dealer.  
Never push objects of any kind into this product through  
openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or  
short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.  
Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
Place the projector near a wall outlet where the plug can  
be easily unplugged.  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning.  
Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a  
damp cloth for cleaning.  
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A. ONLY)  
CAUTION :  
Do not attempt to service this product yourself as  
opening or removing covers may expose you to  
dangerous voltages and other hazards. Refer all service  
to qualified service personnel.  
Do not “ceiling-mount” the projector to a place which  
tends to vibrate; otherwise, the attaching fixture of the  
projector could be broken by the vibration, possibly  
causing it to fall or overturn, which could lead to personal  
injury.  
Do not use attachments not recommended by the  
product manufacturer as they may be hazardous.  
Changes or modification not approved by JVC could void  
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
Do not use this product near water. Do not use  
immediately after moving from a low temperature to high  
temperature, as this causes condensation, which may  
result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer service  
to qualified service personnel under the following  
conditions:  
NOTE :  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital devices, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful  
Use only the accessory cord designed for this product to  
prevent shock.  
a) When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.  
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or  
table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a  
child or adult, and serious damage to the product. The  
product should be mounted according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mount  
recommended by the manufacturer.  
The power supply voltage rating of this product is  
AC 120 V, the power cord attached conforms to the  
following power supply voltage. Use only the power cord  
designated by our dealer to ensure Safety and EMC.  
interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy  
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If  
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio  
or television reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encourage  
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen on the  
product.  
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
d) If the product does not operate normally by following  
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls  
that are covered by the Operation Manual, as an  
improper adjustment of controls may result in damage  
and will often require extensive work by a qualified  
technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
When it is used by other power supply voltage, power  
cable must be changed.  
When the product is used on a cart, care  
should be taken to avoid quick stops,  
excessive force, and uneven surfaces  
which may cause the product and cart to  
overturn, damaging equipment or  
Ensure that the power cable used for the projector is the  
correct type for the AC outlet in your country.  
Consult your product dealer.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any  
way.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
causing possible injury to the operator.  
Power cord  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation. These ensure reliable operation of the  
product and protect it from overheating. These openings  
must not be blocked or covered. (The openings should  
never be blocked by placing the product on bed, sofa,  
rug, or similar surface. It should not be placed in a built-in  
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper  
ventilation is provided and the manufacturer’s  
f ) When the product exhibits a distinct change in  
performance – this indicates a need for service.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit  
different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV  
technician for help.  
When replacement parts are required, be sure the  
service technician has used replacement parts specified  
by the manufacturer or with same characteristics as the  
original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in  
fire, electric shock, or other hazards.  
Power supply voltage: AC 120 V  
About burning-in of the D-ILA device  
*DO NOT allow any unqualified person to  
install the unit.  
Be sure to ask your dealer to install the unit (eg.  
attaching it to the ceilling) since special technical  
knowledge and skills are required for installation.  
If installation is performed by an unqualified person, it  
may cause personal injury or electrical shock.  
Do not allow the same still picture to be projected for a long  
time or an abnormally bright video picture to be projected.  
Do not project video images with high-intensity or high-  
contrast on a screen. The video image could be burned in to  
the D-ILA device.  
Use special care when projecting video games or computer  
program images. There is no problem with ordinary  
video-cassette playback images.  
instructions have been adhered to.)  
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product,  
ask the service technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the product is in proper operating  
condition.  
For proper ventilation, separate the product from other  
equipment, which may prevent ventilation and keep /  
distance more than 23-5/8" (60 cm).  
The product should be placed more than one foot away  
from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,  
stoves, and other products (including amplifiers) that  
produce heat.  
About the installation place  
Do not install the projector in a place that cannot support its  
weight securely.  
If the installation place is not sturdy enough, the projector  
could fall or overturn, possibly causing personal injury.  
3
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories  
The following accessories are included with this projector. Check for them; if any item is missing, please  
contact your dealer.  
Contents  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................. 2  
Contents........................................... 4  
Accessories ..................................... 5  
Controls and Features .................... 6  
Front Side / Top Surface / Right Side .....................6  
Left-hand Side / Rear Side......................................7  
Bottom Surface .......................................................8  
Control Panel on the Projector................................9  
Connector Panel ...................................................11  
Remote Control Unit..............................................12  
Installing Batteries.................................................14  
Precautions for using batteries..............................14  
Setting for Watching Image Software  
(Video Menu Mode Only) ..................................... 48  
Adjusting Picture Quality ...................................... 49  
Adjusting Color temperature................................. 50  
Adjusting the Video Screen/Menu Position .......... 51  
Changing the Image Gamma/Aspect Ratio  
(Video Menu Mode Only) ..................................... 52  
Changing the Image Size - Resize Function  
(PC Menu Mode Only).......................................... 53  
Changing the Clamp pulse position  
(PC Menu Mode Only).......................................... 53  
Setting and Adjusting Other Functions  
(OPTIONS)........................................................... 54  
Getting Information............................................... 56  
I Remote control unit (RM-M160G)  
I Personal computer connection cable  
[approx. 6.56 ft (approx. 2 m)]  
(D-sub, 3-row 15 pin)  
Installing the Projector.................. 15  
Precautions for Installation....................................15  
Adjusting the Inclination of the Projector...............16  
Installing the Projector against the Screen............17  
Projection Distance and Screen Size....................18  
Setting the Amount of Lens Shifting......................19  
Effective Range and Distance of the  
Remote Control Unit..............................................20  
Setting the Position Selecting Screw for Ceiling  
Mounting ...............................................................21  
When installing (adjusting/setting) the unit............21  
Replacing the Fuse........................57  
Replacing the Light-Source  
Lamp ...............................................58  
I Video cable  
[approx. 6.56 ft (approx. 2 m)]  
I AA/R6-size dry cell battery (×2)  
(for checking operation)  
Cleaning and Replacing the  
Filter Cover.....................................63  
Troubleshooting.............................64  
Warning Indication.........................66  
Warning Messages ........................67  
Specifications.................................70  
Outside dimensions.............................................. 72  
Pin assignment (Specifications for terminals) ...... 73  
I Conversion adapter for Mac  
(for Macintosh)  
I Power cord  
[approx. 8.2 ft (approx. 2.5 m)]  
Connecting to Various Devices.... 22  
Signals that Can Be Input to the Projector............22  
Connecting to Video Devices................................24  
Connecting to Hi-Vision Devices/DVD Players .....25  
Connecting to Other Devices ................................26  
Connecting to Devices which Control the  
Projector................................................................27  
Connecting to Computer Devices .........................28  
Connecting to DVI.................................................29  
How to attach the ferrite core................................29  
Connecting the Power Cord..................................30  
Removing the Lens Cap........................................30  
RS-232C external control ..............74  
Appendix.........................................76  
I Ferrite core (×2)  
I BNC-RCA Conversion plug  
Basic Operations........................... 31  
1. Turning on the Power........................................32  
2. Select the Input source to be Projected ............33  
3. Adjust the Screen Size (Zooming) ....................34  
4. Adjust Focus .....................................................34  
5. Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio .......................34  
Turning off Image (HIDE)......................................35  
Removing the Trapezoidal Distortion of the  
Image ....................................................................35  
Quick Alignment Function (QUICK ALIGN.)..........36  
Displaying a Still Picture (FREEZE)......................37  
Zooming a Part of the Image  
I Hex. wrench  
(DIGITAL ZOOM T/W) ..........................................37  
Menu Operations ........................... 38  
Basic Menu Operation...........................................43  
Changing the Color System  
(Video Menu Mode Only) ......................................45  
Changing the Language Display...........................46  
Changing the Screen aspect ratio/HDTV format  
(Video Menu Mode Only) ......................................46  
Adjusting Tracking/Phase .....................................47  
5
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DLA-G150CLU  
Controls and Features  
Controls and Features  
Left-hand Side / Rear Side  
Front Side / Top Surface / Right Side  
R
E
T
N
E
U
N
O
E
E
M
D
I
V
C
P
T
I
E X  
E
T
A
E R  
O P  
T
E
K
E
E S  
R
P
P
M
E
D
I
H
O N  
S T Y E  
T E  
P
A M  
L
N
W
O
D
P
U
1
9
8
7
6
5 4 3  
2
1
Exhaust vents  
Vents for cooling fans through which warm air comes out.  
6
7
Adjustable feet (for adjusting the height and  
angle)  
By extending the feet, the projector angle can be  
adjusted up to +7°.  
For details, refer to “Adjusting the Inclination of the  
Projector” on page 16.  
p
q
Connector panel  
For details, refer to “Connector Panel” on page 11.  
CAUTION  
Rear adjustable foot (for leveling the projector)  
• Do not block the exhaust vents, or heat will build up inside,  
possibly causing a fire. Also, do not touch the vents, or this  
could give you a low-temperature burn.  
It is set at the shortest position when shipped from the  
factory. Turn the foot to make the projector level.  
Adjustment can be made in the range of +1.5° and –1.5°  
from the horizontal position. For details, refer to  
Lens  
One of the optional lens units should be installed before  
using the projector.  
A lens-hole blind cover (black one) is installed when the  
projector is shipped from the factory.  
For details on the types of optional lenses available, refer  
to page 18.  
2
Carrying handle  
Raise this handle when carrying the projector.  
“Adjusting the Inclination of the Projector” on page 16.  
w
e
Air inlet  
CAUTIONS  
This is the air inlet. Do not cover or obstruct this slot.  
• When carrying the projector, do not transmit shocks to it.  
Also be careful to keep it balanced.  
Control panel  
• Do not carry it while the light-source lamp is on or the  
cooling fan is operating. This could cause personal injury.  
CAUTION  
For details, refer to “Control Panel on the Projector” on  
page 9.  
• Please consult your authorized dealer or service center for  
information about attaching an optional lens.  
3
4
AC IN (power input) terminal  
This is the power input terminal where the supplied  
power cord is connected. For details, refer to page 30.  
r
Lens shift knob cap  
When you have mounted a lens that uses the lens shift  
function, open this cap and rotate the lens shift knob to  
move the lens position. For more information, refer to  
“Setting the Amount of Lens Shifting” on page 19.  
8
Lens cap  
This is the lens cap provided for the optional lens.  
When you are not using the projector, attach the lens cap  
to protect the lens from dirt or being damaged. (Refer to  
page 30.)  
Fuse holder  
A fuse rated 12A/250V is installed. (Power source  
protection)  
To replace the fuse, refer to page 57.  
9
Remote sensor  
When operating with the remote control, aim it toward  
this sensor. (Refer to page 20.)  
CAUTION  
• When replacing the fuse, use the same rating and type.  
Otherwise, a fire may occur and/or the projector may be  
damaged.  
5
MAIN POWER switch  
This is the main power switch. When it is turned on, the  
projector goes into stand-by state, and the STAND BY  
indicator on the control panel comes on. (Refer to  
page 32.)  
ON [ | ]: The main power turns on.  
OFF []: The main power turns off.  
                              
7
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and Features  
Controls and Features  
Control Panel on the Projector  
Bottom Surface  
r
e
1
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
LAMP  
TEMP  
2
3
HIDE  
w
q
t
PC  
4
5
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
VIDEO  
MENU  
y
u
6
7
p
9
8
EXIT  
ENTER  
i
t
Air inlet (filter)  
1
STAND BY Indicator  
Memo  
Air is taken in through the filter to cool the light-source  
lamp. If the filter is blocked or if something that obstructs  
the flow of air is placed around the projector, heat may  
build up inside and could cause a fire. For required  
space, refer to “Precautions for Installation” on page 15.  
ON :  
When in stand-by mode.  
While in the cool-down mode (STAND BY indicator is blinking):  
Even if you press the OPERATE button, the projector is not  
turned on. Wait until the projector enters stand-by mode  
(STAND BY indicator stays lit).  
Blinking :When in cool-down mode.  
Memo  
About the cool-down mode:  
4
PC button  
This projector has a function to cool down the heated lamp for a  
fixed period of time (approx. 120 seconds) after projection is  
finished. This feature is referred to as the cool-down mode.  
The purpose of the cool-down mode is to prevent inner parts  
from being deformed or broken by heat from the heated lamp  
as well as to prolong the life of the lamp.  
CAUTIONS  
Use this button to select a device connected to the PC 1,  
PC 2 or DVI terminals. Each time you press the button,  
the selection alternates among PC 1, PC 2 and DVI.  
* “PC1” , “PC2” or “DVI” will be displayed on the top right of  
the projected image. (This function can be disabled by  
the menu.)  
• Be careful as paper, cloth or soft cushion could be drawn in  
if placed nearby. Do not block the filter, or heat may build  
up and could cause a fire.  
• Clean the filter periodically. For details, refer to “Cleaning  
and Replacing the Filter Cover” on page 63. Deposition of  
dirt on the filter reduces the cooling effect, causing heat to  
build up inside, which could cause a fire or malfunction.  
CAUTIONS  
5
VIDEO button  
Use this button to select a device such as a video deck  
connected to the AV IN (Y/C, VIDEO or COMP) terminal  
of the projector. Each time you press the button, the  
selection alternates among Y/C, VIDEO and COMP.  
* “Y/C”, “VIDEO” or “COMP” will be displayed on the top right of  
the projected image. (This function can be disabled by the  
menu.)  
• Do not turn off the MAIN POWER switch while in the cool-  
down mode.  
• Do not place the projector on its side or stand it upright  
y
Opening for replacing the light-source lamp  
For replacing the light-source lamp, refer to “Replacing  
the Light-Source Lamp” on page 58.  
while in the cool-down mode; this may block the vents.  
2
3
OPERATE indicator  
u
i
Fixing foot  
ON : When the projector is in operation (projecting).  
OFF : When the projector is not in operation (not  
projecting).  
Position selecting screw for ceiling mounting  
When using the projector in an upside-down, ceiling-  
mounted position (inverted top-to-bottom and right-to-  
left), the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting”  
must be turned to switch to ceiling mounting.  
This will correct variance in color images (shading),  
which otherwise would occur in ceiling mounting.  
For more information, refer to “Setting the Position  
Selecting Screw for Ceiling Mounting” on page 21.  
6
7
MENU button  
Use this button to enter or exit the menu mode. The main  
menu appears or disappears at the screen. For details,  
refer to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
OPERATE button  
When the projector is in the stand-by mode, press this  
button one second or more, and the projector is turned  
on, causing the OPERATE indicator to light.  
Press it one second or more again, and the projector  
goes into the cool-down mode, then stand-by mode.  
(Refer to page 32.)  
* You cannot use the OPERATE button for about one  
minute after the lamp blinks. Press the button after a  
minute or longer has elapsed.  
ENTER button  
This button will be used in the menu mode. Use to  
display the hierarchical menus. Also use when “ENTER”  
is displayed against the item on the menu screen or  
when the “All reset” selection is confirmed. For details,  
refer to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
CAUTION  
• To ceiling-mount and adjust the projector, special expertise  
and technique are necessary. Be sure to ask your dealer or  
specialist to perform this work.  
8
Cursor buttons 5  
/
/
2/  
3
These buttons will be used in the menu mode to select an  
item, or to set or adjust the value. For details, refer to  
“Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
9
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DLA-G150CLU  
Controls and Features  
Controls and Features  
9
EXIT button  
Connector Panel  
This button will be used in the menu mode to return to the  
previous menu. When the main menu is displayed, this  
button will cause the menu to disappear. For details, refer  
to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
4
5
p
PRESET button  
R
Y
This PRESET button only works as a reset button for the  
direct button adjustment of the KEYSTONE button of the  
control panel and the DIGITAL ZOOM button of the  
remote control. When adjusting the keystone or digital  
zoom (when the setting is displayed on the screen) the  
adjusted value is reset to that which was set when the  
projector was shipped from the factory. Of the menu  
items, this button only works for the keystone setting  
screen.  
1
2
Y/C  
6
7
8
G
B
H
V
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
VIDEO  
P
REMOTE  
IN  
3
9
q
w
KEYSTONE  
/
buttons  
Use these buttons to correct a trapezoidal distortion of  
the projected image. (Refer to page 35.)  
IN  
OUT  
HIDE button  
1
PC (computer) 1 input terminal (D-sub 3-row 15  
pin)  
This is an input terminal dedicated to computer signals  
(RGB video signals and sync signals).  
Connect the display output terminal of the computer to  
this terminal. When a Macintosh computer is to be  
connected, use the supplied conversion adapter for Mac.  
5
6
Component terminal  
Component signals (Y, B-Y, R-Y) or DTV-format (Y, PB  
R) signals. (Devices which have component output  
terminals can be connected.)  
* For details about DTV-format signals (480i, 480p, 720p,  
1080i) compatible with this unit, refer to page 22.  
Use this button to turn off the image on the screen  
temporarily. Pressing it again restores the image to  
resume. (Refer to page 35.)  
,
P
e
LAMP indicator  
ON :  
After the light-source lamp has been used for  
more than approx. 900 hours. (NORMAL only)  
Y/C (S-video) input terminal (Mini DIN 4 pin)  
Connect this terminal to the S-video output terminal of a  
video deck, etc.  
Attach the ferrite core (accessory) to the cable which is  
connected to the Y/C input terminal. (Refer to page 29.)  
Blinking : After the light-source lamp has been used for  
more than approx. 1000 hours (1900 hours in the  
LPC or LOC mode). Replace the light-source  
lamp. Refer to “Replacing the Light-Source  
Lamp” on page 58 or page 59.  
Note  
• When computer-related signals are input, the uppermost  
edge of the image may appear to bow if the sync signal  
input is composite sync (Cs) or G on sync signal. In this  
case, use separate sync signals for vertical sync (V) and  
horizontal sync (H).  
7
8
VIDEO (composite video) input terminal (BNC)  
Connect this terminal to the composite video output  
terminal of a video deck, etc.  
r
TEMP indicator  
Blinking : The temperature inside the projector has risen  
abnormally.  
2
PC (computer) OUT terminal (D-sub 3-row 15 pin)  
This is the terminal for video output from the monitor of  
the computer connected to PC1 or PC2.  
The computer input signal projected on the screen is  
output. A display monitor can be used by connecting it to  
this terminal.  
REMOTE terminal (stereo mini jack)  
Connect an infrared remote control extension unit, etc. to  
this jack.  
Attach the ferrite core (accessory) to the cable which is  
connected to the REMOTE terminal. (Refer to page 29.)  
* For details, consult your dealer.  
Note  
• While the TEMP indicator is blinking (during abnormal  
temperature), the power is automatically cut off.  
3
4
DVI terminal [DVI-D 24 pin]  
This is the digital RGBHV input terminal.  
• The Mac ADC is not supported.  
9
RS-232C CONTROL terminal IN/OUT (D-sub 9 pin)  
This is the RS-232C interface-specified terminal. The  
projector can be controlled by a computer connected  
externally.  
PC (computer) 2 input terminals (BNC × 5)  
These are multipurpose video input terminals that allow  
input of the following signals.  
* For details, refer to page 27 and 74.  
• Analog RGB signals, vertical sync (V) signals, and  
horizontal sync (H) signals / composite signals (Cs).  
(Devices which have analog RGB signal output  
terminals can be connected.)  
* Input of external sync signals is automatically detected.  
Detection of H/V signals or Cs signals causes automatic  
switching to external sync. The priority order is H/V > Cs.  
Note  
• When computer-related signals are input, the uppermost  
edge of the image may appear to bow if the sync signal  
input is composite sync (Cs) or G on sync signal. In this  
case, use separate sync signals for vertical sync (V) and  
horizontal sync (H).  
10  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and Features  
Controls and Features  
r
DIGITAL ZOOM T/W buttons  
A part of image can be magnified up to four times on the  
screen.  
Each time the T or W button is pressed, the image is  
enlarged or the enlarged image is reduced by a certain  
degree. (Refer to page 37.)  
* Images which are enlarged with the digital zoom become  
less clear.  
Remote Control Unit  
On the remote control, the same buttons as on the control  
panel of the projector are provided except for the following  
buttons. For the same buttons, operation is the same in  
principle.  
5
VIDEO button  
Use this button to select a device such as a video deck  
connected to the AV IN terminal (VIDEO, Y/C or COMP  
input terminal) of the projector. Each time you press the  
button, the selection alternates among Y/C, VIDEO and  
DVI. (Refer to page 33.)  
* “Y/C”, “VIDEO” or “DVI” will be displayed on the top right  
of the projected image. (This function can be disabled by  
the menu.)  
For remote control only:  
DIGITAL ZOOM T/W, QUICK ALIGN., FREEZE, ZOOM T/  
W, FOCUS +/–, SCREEN W/S, PC 1, PC 2, VIDEO, Y/C,  
DVI, COMP.  
* Depending on the video signal source (UXGA, etc.), this  
button does not work.  
t
PC buttons  
Use these buttons to select a device connected to the PC  
1, PC 2 or DVI terminals. (Refer to page 33.)  
* “PC 1”, “PC 2” or “DVI” will be displayed on the top right  
of the projected image. (This function can be disabled  
using the menu.)  
1
6
7
ZOOM T/W buttons  
Use these buttons to adjust the projected screen size.  
T (Tele): The projected screen size decreases.  
W (Wide):The projected screen size increases.  
QUICK  
OPERATE  
ALIGN.  
FOCUS +/– buttons  
Use these buttons to adjust the focus of the projected  
video image.  
+ : The focus point becomes more distant.  
– : The focus point becomes nearer.  
y
u
SCREEN W/S buttons  
Changes the projection screen size to [4:3] or [16:9].  
u
y
t
2
HIDE  
W
3
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
S
VIDEO  
Y/C  
4
6
PC1  
PC2  
DVI  
QUICK ALIGN. (Quick Alignment) button  
5
7
8
r
Use this button to automatically align “Horizontal and  
vertical position”, “Tracking” and “Phase” for the  
projected image.  
During the automatic alignment, “Quick Alignment”  
appears on the screen, and disappears after alignment is  
finished. (Refer to page 36.)  
* The “Quick Alignment” function only works when the  
signal is input from the input terminal of PC 1, PC 2 or  
DVI. It does not work when the signal is input from the  
VIDEO IN terminal (VIDEO, Y/C and COMP. input  
terminal).  
T
T
ZOOM  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
e
w
W
W
8
9
p
MENU button  
PRESET  
Use this button to enter or exit the menu mode. The main  
menu appears or disappears at the screen. For details,  
refer to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
9
p
q
EXIT  
ENTER  
Cursor buttons  
5/  
/
2
/
3
These buttons are used in the menu mode to select an  
item or to set or adjust the value. For details, refer to  
“Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
ENTER button  
1
2
Remote control’s signal transmitter  
OPERATE button  
When the projector is in the stand-by mode, press this  
button one second or more, and the projector is turned  
on, causing the OPERATE indicator to light.  
Press it one second or more again, and the projector  
goes into the cool-down mode, then stand-by mode.  
(Refer to page 32.)  
CAUTION  
This button is used in the menu mode. Use to display the  
hierarchical menus. Also use when “ENTER” is displayed  
against the item on the menu screen or when the “All  
reset” selection is confirmed. For details, refer to “Basic  
Menu Operation” on page 43.  
• Automatic alignment with the quick alignment function  
should be carried out on a bright still-picture. This function  
may not work correctly on a dark picture or motion-picture.  
If adjustment with this function is not satisfactory, adjust  
“Horizontal and vertical position”, “Tracking” and “Phase” in  
the menu mode.  
q
w
EXIT button  
This button is used in the menu mode to return to the  
previous menu. When the main menu is displayed, this  
button will cause the menu to disappear. For details, refer  
to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
* The OPERATE button will not work for approximately 1  
minute from when the light-source lamp is turned on. Use  
the button after approximately 1 minute.  
PRESET button  
Memo  
This PRESET button only works as a reset button for the  
direct button adjustment of the KEYSTONE button of the  
control panel and the DIGITAL ZOOM button of the  
remote control. When adjusting the keystone or digital  
zoom (when the setting is displayed on the screen) the  
adjusted value is reset to that which was set when the  
projector was shipped from the factory. Of the menu  
items, this button only works for the keystone setting  
screen.  
While in the cool-down mode (STAND BY indicator is  
blinking):  
Even if you press the OPERATE button, the projector is not  
turned on. Wait until the projector enters stand-by mode  
(STAND BY indicator stays lit).  
3
HIDE button  
Use this button to turn off the image on the screen  
temporarily. Pressing it again makes the image to  
resume. (Refer to page 35.)  
e
KEYSTONE  
/
buttons  
Use these buttons to correct a trapezoidal distortion of  
the projected image. (Refer to page 35.)  
4
FREEZE button  
During projection of an image on the screen, press this  
button to obtain a still picture.  
To restore normal projection, press it again. (Refer to  
page 37.)  
* Depending on the video signal source (UXGA, etc.), this  
button does not work.  
13  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and Features  
Installing the Projector  
Installing Batteries  
Install batteries in the remote control. If the remote control has started to work erratically, replace the  
batteries.  
Precautions for Installation  
CAUTIONS  
1. Before installation, do not connect the projector’s power cord.  
2. Do not install the projector in the following places:  
• Where there is water, humidity or dust.  
• Where the projector may be subjected to oil, smoke or cigarette smoke.  
• On a soft surface such as a carpet or cushion.  
1
Open the back cover.  
Open the back cover in the direction of the arrow.  
Precautions for using batteries  
If batteries are used incorrectly, they may crack or  
leak liquid. This could cause a fire, burn, malfunction,  
or staining or damaging of the surroundings.  
• Where the projector may be subjected to direct sunlight.  
• Where temperature is high or humidity is low.  
Beware of the following:  
• Do not mix new and old batteries.  
• Do not mix different types of batteries as they differ in  
characteristics.  
• Place batteries so they match the polarities indicated:  
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).  
• Be sure to put the minus (–) end in first to avoid  
short-circulating.  
• Use only designated batteries.  
• Remove the batteries if the remote is not to be used for a  
prolonged period.  
• When the batteries are exhausted, replace them  
immediately. Otherwise, liquid could leak, or malfunction  
could occur due to leaking liquid. If the leaked liquid  
contacts the skin, wipe it off with a cloth, otherwise the skin  
could become rough.  
Allowable operation temperature range: 41°F to 95°F (+5°C to +35°C)  
Allowable relative humidity range: 20% to 80% (no condensation)  
Allowable storage temperature range: 14°F to 140°F (–10°C to +60°C)  
I
When installing the projector, observe the following:  
• Do not use the projector placed on its side.  
Avoid using the projector placed on its side. This could cause a malfunction.  
• Use the projector within the specified angle.  
Do not use the projector inclined ±30° horizontally (left/right). This could cause color variation or shorten the lamp life.  
• Do not block the exhaust vents.  
Do not use a cover which encloses the projector air-tight or blocks the exhaust vents. Allow sufficient space around the  
projector. When the projector is enclosed in a space of the following dimensions, use an air conditioner so the temperature  
inside becomes equal to the outside temperature.  
2
3
Install the batteries.  
Place the two supplied batteries (AA/R6-size) in the  
remote control as illustrated below.  
Allowable minimum space required  
• Do not put batteries into a fire or try to recharge them.  
• Batteries run for six months to one year in normal use.  
However, the batteries supplied are for confirming  
operation and may not run that long. When the remote  
control starts failing to work properly, replace the batteries  
with new ones.  
300mm  
200mm  
600mm  
Close the back cover.  
First fit the claws on the back cover in the case, then  
close the back cover in the direction of the arrow.  
300mm  
200mm  
14  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Projector  
Installing the Projector  
Installing the Projector against the Screen  
Adjusting the Inclination of the Projector  
The projector should be placed so that the center line of the lens is at a right angle to the screen as shown in the following  
figures.  
The vertical angle and the leveling of the projector can be adjusted with the adjustable feet at the bottom of the projector.  
I
Side view  
I
Top view  
I
Adjusting the vertical angle of the projector  
While pushing the levers on both sides upward, raise the projector. The adjustable feet automatically extend.  
To retract the feet, push the levers and lower the projector slowly; the projector is fixed at the position  
where you release the levers.  
I
Trapezoidal-distortion correctable maximum angle  
The projector has a function to correct the trapezoidal distortion of the projected image on the screen.  
To correct this distortion, use the KEYSTONE buttons on the projector. (Refer to “Removing the Trapezoidal Distortion of the  
Image” on page 35.) Also, correction is possible by using the “Keystone” menu. (Refer to “Setting and Adjusting Other  
Functions (OPTIONS)” on page 54.)  
lever  
Adjustable feet (at the front)  
Correctable angle:  
Correctable angle:  
I
Leveling the projector  
Lift the projector, rotate the rear adjustable foot, and adjust the horizontal angle until the projector is level.  
Adjustable foot (at the rear)  
Fixing foot (at the rear)  
Up to approx. 20° downward from the horizontal line  
Up to approx. 20° upward from the horizontal line  
Extend  
Shorten  
17  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Projector  
Installing the Projector  
Projection Distance and Screen Size  
Setting the Amount of Lens Shifting  
• The range of projection distances that can be focused depends on the lens unit (optional) to be used. When the aspect ratio  
of the screen is 4:3, the range is as follows and you need to install the projector within this range.  
When the lens unit (optional) with the lens shifting function is used, the projected screen can be shifted up and down in  
position.  
Notes  
Lens type  
Approximate projection distance  
0.77 m to 4.03 m  
1.76 m to 4.50 m  
2.77 m to 19.71 m  
4.74 m to 29.87 m  
GL-M2910G  
GL-M2915SG  
GL-M2920ZG  
GL-M2930SZG  
• The amount of shifting is within the range of approx. 30% to 55%.  
• After finishing the lens shift setting, tighten the SHIFT LOCK fixing bolt firmly so that the lens will not move.  
1
2
Turn the cap on the top of the projector to open it.  
*: The value for projection distance is a guide (reference) one. The projected image size may vary depending on the  
manufacturing tolerance of the projection lens.  
Loosen the SHIFT LOCK fixing bolt.  
Use the hex. wrench supplied.  
Change of projection screen  
according to aspect ratio  
Screen  
3
Rotate the LENS SHIFT knob to adjust the position (shift amount) of the projected  
Screen with 4:3 aspect ratio  
screen.  
Rotate it to the right: The lens shifts upward.  
Rotate it to the left: The lens shifts downward.  
4
5
Tighten the SHIFT LOCK fixing bolt firmly.  
Use the hex. wrench supplied.  
Turn the cap to close it.  
Screen with 16:9 aspect ratio  
SHIFT LOCK fixing bolt  
90˚  
90˚  
90˚  
LENS SHIFT knob  
Center line of the lens  
To move the Shift position by 50%, set the bottom edge of the projec-  
tion screen so that it is at the same height as the center of the lens.  
I Projected screen position image by amount of shift  
Notes  
* The projected screen position can only shift in an up-and-down direction.  
The illustration shows the screen shifted sidewise for the purpose of explanation.  
• For detailed relationship between projection distances and projection screen sizes, refer to Appendix A. The relationships for  
both 4:3 and 16:9 ratios are listed there.  
• When installing a screen, use a 4:3 aspect-ratio picture.  
• (A 16 : 9 aspect-ratio picture is projected based on the width of the range in which a 4:3 aspect-ratio picture is projected.)  
• The diagonal length of a 16:9 aspect-ratio screen is about 91.8% that of a 4:3 aspect-ratio screen. This value is only a guide  
(reference).  
• If sunlight or lamp light strikes the projection screen directly, the picture tends to become pale and dim. Use a curtain or  
other means to shield the light.  
• Set the projector horizontally on a surface that is within the range of adjustable angles (up/down adjustment angle: +7° ;  
horizontal adjustment angle: ±1.5°).  
• If the keystone is adjusted, the projected screen becomes smaller.  
• When hanging from the ceiling, use a dedicated hanging fixture (not supplied).  
Approx. 55%  
Approx. 50%  
Approx. 30%  
I Optional Lenses  
This projector does not include a lens. You can select one of the optional lenses to adjust the projection distance. Please ask  
your authorized dealer or service center to install the lens.  
Lens model  
Function  
GL-M2910G  
Powered focus for rear projection, short focal length (subject ratio 1:1), 0% influence.  
Powered focus, short focal length (subject ratio 1.5:1), powered image adjustment (2%  
zoom), includes manual vertical shift function, 30%-55% influence  
GL-M2915SG  
GL-M2920ZG  
GL-M2930SZG  
Powered zoom/powered focus lens (subject ratio 2:1-3:1), 50% influence.  
Powered zoom/powered focus long focal length lens (subject ratio 2.9:1-5.5:1), includes  
manual vertical shift function, 30%-55% influence.  
18  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Projector  
Installing the Projector  
Setting the Position Selecting Screw for Ceiling Mounting  
Effective Range and Distance of the Remote Control Unit  
When using the projector in an upside-down, ceiling-mounted position (inverted top-to-bottom and right-to-left), the “position  
selecting screw for ceiling mounting” must be turned to switch to ceiling mounting.  
This will correct variance in color images (shading), which otherwise would occur in ceiling mounting.  
To revert to normal desktop setting, turn the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting” back to the initial position (factory-  
shipped).  
The remote control unit can be used as either a wireless remote control unit or a wired one.  
I
Using as a wireless remote control unit  
Aim the remote control unit toward the remote sensor on the front or the rear of the projector.  
The operable distance of the remote control unit is about 10 m for direct reception. The remote control unit can be used by  
having it reflected on the screen. In this case, the total distance of “A+B” should be about 10 m or less. The operable angles  
of the remote control unit are 15° right and left, and 15° up and down.  
When using the projector in an upside-down, ceiling-mounted position:  
Turn the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting” fully counterclockwise (until it is turning idly).  
Screen  
To again use the projector in a normal desktop setting:  
Turn the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting” fully clockwise (until it firmly tightens).  
For normal desktop mounting:  
Turn the screw clockwise.  
For upside-down, ceiling-mounting:  
Turn the screw counterclockwise.  
15˚  
15˚  
CAUTIONS  
Projector  
15˚  
To ceiling-mount and adjust the projector, special expertise and technique are  
necessary. Be sure to ask your dealer or a specialist to perform this work.  
To turn the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting”, use a Phillips  
screwdriver with a 30-mm or longer shank.  
A
15˚  
B
The screw is located in the hole shown in the illustration.  
Position selecting screw for ceiling mounting  
Note  
• When using the projector in a ceiling-mounted position, you should reverse the projected image by changing the settings of  
Right Left rev. and Top Bottom inv. menus. For details, refer to page 54. You can also change these settings without  
receiving a video signal. In this case, refer to “Menu Transition Diagram in No signal Menu Mode” on page 38.  
Remote control unit  
When installing (adjusting/setting) the unit  
• When using “Top Bottom inv.” on the “Options” menu, reset the unit by following the procedure below.  
• This reset procedure must be performed before operating the unit.  
1. Change the “Top Bottom inv.” Setting on the “Options” menu.  
2. Press the OPERATE button to enter the unit into the stand-by mode.  
3. Press the OPERATE button again to turn on the unit.  
• Adjust the focus after projecting a picture for 30 minutes or longer.  
21  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Before connection, be sure to turn off the projector and connected devices.  
Read the manual which comes with each device thoroughly.  
I Allowable input signals  
Horizontal res- Vertical resolu- Horizontal fre-  
Vertical fre-  
quency  
Signal  
olution  
tion  
quency  
Signals that Can Be Input to the Projector  
The following signals can be input to the projector:  
Hor [Pixels]  
Ver [Lines]  
H [kHz]  
V [Hz]  
PC system  
PC98  
PC/AT  
DOS/V  
DVI*  
VESA350  
640  
350  
37.86  
84.13  
PC98  
640  
640  
400  
480  
24.83  
31.47  
37.86  
37.50  
43.27  
35.16  
37.88  
48.08  
46.88  
53.67  
35.52  
48.36  
56.48  
60.02  
68.68  
46.43  
63.98  
79.98  
91.15  
75.00  
35.00  
49.73  
60.24  
68.68  
33.75  
33.72  
31.47  
45.00  
44.96  
33.75  
33.72  
27.00  
15.734  
15.625  
15.625  
56.42  
59.94  
72.81  
75.00  
85.01  
56.25  
60.32  
72.19  
75.00  
85.06  
43.48  
60.00  
70.07  
75.03  
85.00  
43.44  
60.02  
75.03  
85.02  
60.00  
66.67  
74.55  
74.93  
75.06  
60.00  
59.94  
59.94  
60.00  
59.94  
60.00  
59.94  
24.00  
60  
I Video signals  
VGA 60Hz*  
VGA 72Hz*  
VGA 75Hz*  
VGA 85Hz*  
SVGA 56Hz*  
SVGA 60Hz*  
SVGA 72Hz*  
SVGA 75Hz*  
SVGA 85Hz*  
XGA 43Hz*  
XGA 60Hz*  
XGA 70Hz*  
XGA 75Hz*  
XGA 85Hz*  
SXGA 43Hz*  
SXGA 60Hz*  
SXGA 75Hz*  
SXGA 85Hz*  
UXGA 60Hz  
MAC13  
(1) Response to color systems  
640  
480  
Color systems  
640  
480  
NTSC  
NTSC4.43  
PAL  
SECAM  
640  
480  
Input terminal  
VIDEO  
800  
600  
- - - - -  
*2  
800  
600  
*1  
*2  
*2  
Y/C  
800  
600  
Y, PB/B-Y, PR/R-Y  
G, B, R, H/CS, V  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
800  
600  
*2  
800  
600  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1600  
640  
768/2  
768  
*1:Responds if Y/C output is available.  
*2:Signifies that component signals (“Y, PB, PR” / “Y, B-Y, R-Y” / “G, B, R, H/CS, V”) conform to the signal timing  
(synchronization and video period) of each color system. The color systems are used for convenience only.  
768  
(2) Response to double density (*3), high-vision signals  
768  
NTSC*4  
NTSC*5  
Input terminal  
Y, PB/B-Y, PR/R-Y  
G, B, R, H/CS, V  
High-vision signal  
768  
1024/2  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1200  
480  
*3:Signals whose density of scanning lines/field is twice as high.  
*4:Responds to signals whose horizontal scanning frequency is 31.5 kHz. NTSC can be made twice as dense by a line  
doubler (separately available: recommended article). Also, possible to respond to fully-specified, decoded  
wide-clear-vision signal and decoded 525P progressive signal.  
Mac  
*5:Responds to signals whose horizontal scanning frequency is 33.5 kHz. PAL can be made twice as dense by a line doubler  
(separately available: recommended article).  
(3) Response to DTV-format signals  
MAC16  
832  
624  
MAC19  
1024  
1152  
768  
DTV-format signals (480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i) can be input to the Y, PB/B-Y, PR/R-Y, G, B, R, H/CS, V input terminal.  
MAC21  
870  
Video system  
Video  
HDTV (1035i) 60Hz  
HDTV (1035i) 59Hz  
480p  
I Computer signals  
Signals with the following scanning frequencies can be input to the PC 1 or PC 2 (G, B, R, H/CS, V) and DVI terminals.  
720  
1280  
1280  
1920  
1920  
1920  
483  
720  
Horizontal scanning frequency  
Vertical scanning frequency  
15kHz - 105kHz  
50Hz - 100Hz  
720p 60Hz  
720p 59Hz  
1080i 60Hz  
1080i 59Hz  
1080 24sF  
NTSC  
720  
Be sure that the computer to be used suffices the following conditions:  
• The computer has the video signal output port.  
Be sure that the computer has the video signal output port by reading the instruction book of the computer.  
The video signal output port is generally called as “RGB port”, “monitor port”, or “video port”. If the computer-monitor hybrid  
type or note type is used, it may need to prepare for an external output port. Also, there will be the type to which an external  
output port cannot be installed.  
1080/2  
1080/2  
1080  
PAL  
50  
• DVI input  
SECAM  
50  
During DVI input, depending on the computer settings, there may be no signal input or an error may occur (blue screen).  
If this happens, turn off the power to both the projector and the computer, and then turn the projector back on before turning  
the computer on again. Then correctly set the computer's graphic board.  
* A signal that can be input by DVI (V-sync 85Hz is not supported.)  
• The resolution and the scanning frequencies are within the range specified in the table on page 23.  
Be sure that the resolution and the scanning frequencies of the video signal are within the range. A video signal out of range  
cannot be used. (Even signals out of the range could be projected. However, it may not sharp enough. On the other hand,  
even some of the signals within the range may require adjustment depending on the video board used.)  
When a signal other than listed in the table on page 23 is input, the image could be partially erased or an unneeded fold-over  
image could appear.  
Notes  
• The resolution for the input signals is listed in the above table.  
• Even signals in the frequency range that can be input may not be displayed normally depending on the type of the signal.  
• When a signal other than listed above is input, the image could be partially erased or an unneeded fold-over image could  
appear.  
• Some signals other than listed above can be displayed. But they may require adjustment.  
• Even some of the signals listed above may require adjustment depending on the video board used.  
• Composite sync (CS) and G on Sync signals cannot be handled depending on the devices connected.  
• The VGA signal of the PC system could be displayed in 480p mode of the VIDEO system. (In this case, the projector enters  
video menu mode when the MENU button is pressed.)  
Even signals in the frequency range that can be input may not be displayed normally depending on the type of the signal.  
Composite sync (CS) and G on Sync signals cannot be handled depending on the devices connected.  
22  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Hi-Vision Devices/DVD Players  
Connecting to Video Devices  
Before connecting, be sure to turn off both the projector and Hi-Vision devices/DVD players.  
• Thoroughly read the manual that comes with each Hi-Vision device or DVD player.  
• Use separately available BNC cables to connect Hi-Vision devices and DVD players.  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and video device.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with each video device.  
• Use the supplied video cable. An video cable with an S-video (Y/C) terminal is not supplied.  
To Y  
To PC 2  
Y
Y/C  
To PB/B-Y  
H
V
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
To AV IN  
R
Y
To PR/R-Y  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
P
BNC-RCAconversion  
G
B
H
V
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
plug (accessory)  
REMOTE  
VIO  
P
REMOTE  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
S-video cable  
(separately available)  
BNC cable  
(separately available)  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
Video cable  
(accessory)  
Hi-Vision devices  
DVD player  
Video devices  
• W-VHS VCR  
• VCR (Video cassette recorder)  
• Laser videodisc player  
• Text/video camera  
• Camcorder  
• Hi-Vision video camera  
Notes  
• Connect a composite image signal output device or Y/C (S-video) image output device.  
• When connecting the S-video cable, refer to “How to attach the ferrite core” on page 29.  
Note  
Memo  
• Connect a component signal output device or DTV-format signal output device.  
• When connecting a video device, use a TBC along with it, or one which has a built-in TBC.  
Memo  
• Use of an extension cable to connect a video device and the projector could cause video degradation.  
• When a signal with much jitter is reproduced on a VCR, or special-effect playback is performed, the upper part of the image  
or the image itself may be erased or distorted.  
• Other devices with component signal output terminals (DVD player (NTSC), etc.) can be connected.  
(*DVD: Digital Video Disc)  
• DTV-format signals (480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i) can be input. For DTV-format signals which can be handled, refer to “Video  
signals” on page 22.  
25  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Other Devices  
Connecting to Devices which Control the Projector  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and other devices to be connected.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with the device to be connected.  
• Use the supplied video cable or the cable supplied with the game device.  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and devices to be connected.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with each device to be connected.  
• By connecting a computer to the RS-232C terminal, you can control the projector. Also, you can make an infrared remote  
sensor extension unit and connect it to the REMOTE terminal of the projector.  
* Obtain connection cables as required. Use a reverse connection cable.  
* For details, refer to “RS-232C external control” on page 74.  
* For further details, consult your dealer or an authorized service center.  
R
Y
Y/C  
BNC-RCA conversion  
plug (accessory)  
G
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
R
Y
To VIDEO  
V
Y/C  
B
H
V
P
G
B
H
V
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
To AV IN  
REMOTE  
VIDEO  
P
TO CONTROL  
REMOTE  
IN  
Cable supplied with the  
game device, or supplied  
video cable  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Game device, etc.  
• Desktop type  
IN  
OUT  
*
To RS-232C connector  
To RS-232C connector  
Infrared remote sensor  
extension unit  
• Note type  
(Needs to be made)  
RS-232C reverse  
connection cable  
(separately available)  
* By directly connecting the OUT terminal  
to the second DLA-G150CLU IN  
terminal, a number of DLA-G150CLU  
units can be controlled by a single  
computer.  
To RS-232C connector  
Note  
• When connecting the cable to the REMOTE terminal, refer to “How to attach the ferrite core” on page 29.  
26  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to DVI  
Connecting to Computer Devices  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and computer devices.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with each device.  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and computer devices.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with each device.  
I Connection to an IBM PC or IBM-compatible computer  
• Use the supplied personal computer connection cable. Also, prepare cables required for connecting the devices  
connected.  
R
Y
• Desktop type  
G
B
H
V
P
P
To PC 1  
Personal Computer  
To monitor  
connector  
To PC 2  
connection cable (supplied)  
To R  
R
Y
To G  
To B  
To PC 1  
DVI (DVI-D 24pin Cable)  
G
B
H
V
DOS/V  
P/B-Y  
(Available separately)  
To PC OUT  
IN  
(DVI VIDEO BOARD)  
P/R-Y  
• Notebook type  
Cable  
IN  
supplied  
To H/Cs  
To V  
with the  
display (or  
separately  
available)  
(D-sub 3-  
row 15-pin)  
IN  
Note  
* There are some notebook types which  
do not allow the computer’s LCD to work  
if an external display is connected. With  
such a notebook computer, the LCD  
display and external display output  
need to be switched.  
• Other connections are the same as in the connection example for IBM PC or IBM compatible PCs.  
To PC 2  
IN  
To PC 2  
How to attach the ferrite core  
Separate cable (separately available)  
Attach the ferrite core when using the S-video cable or infrared remote sensor extension unit which are sold separately.  
However, use a cable that can be wound once.  
• Desktop type  
1
Release the stopper at each end and  
open the ferrite core.  
To monitor connector  
Stoppers  
Wind the cable once.  
2
Wind the cord around the ferrite core.  
Attach the ferrite core about 3 cm from the end of the  
cord.  
• RGB output devices  
To R  
To G  
To B  
Laser video disc  
player, etc.  
POWER  
To H/Cs  
3
Close the ferrite core with the cord  
inside until you hear it click shut.  
Display monitor  
To V  
Click!  
* When a display monitor is connected to  
the PC OUT terminal, you can view the  
video from the computer on the monitor.  
Note  
• When connecting, connect the terminal which is at the  
ferrite core end of the cord to the projector.  
29  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Basic Operations  
Connecting the Power Cord  
After all devices have been finished being connected, connect the supplied power cord. At this time, do not yet turn on the  
MAIN POWER switch.  
I Lamp control settings  
After turning the power on, first perform the lamp control settings on the setting menu referring to “Setting and Adjusting Other  
Functions (OPTIONS)” on page 54.  
1
Insert the supplied power cord into the  
power input terminal of the projector.  
There are 3 modes in the lamp control settings.  
1: NORMAL MODE (Normal)  
R
E
T
N
E
O
E
D
I
U N  
E
M
C
P
V
T
I
X
E
E
T
A
R
E
P
O
T
E
S E  
E
N
O
R
P
P
M
E
E
D
I
H
T
S Y E  
K
T
P
M
A
L
N
W
O
D
P
U
Used as a normal lamp.  
The projector is set to “Normal” mode at the time of purchase.  
* “Lamp replacement” appears on the screen when the lamp use time exceeds 1000 hours.  
2: LIGHT POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC)  
Automatically controls the power used by the lamp and increases it in steps. When this mode is used, the brightness  
starts at approximately 70%. The decrease in brightness is slower than in “Normal” mode and this mode is best suited  
when using the projector continuously for long periods of time.  
Ferrite core  
* “Lamp replacement” appears on the screen when the lamp use time exceeds 2000 hours.  
3: LIGHT OUTPUT CONTROL MODE (LOC)  
The brightness can be set in seven levels (-6 to 0). Since the brightness can be set in steps, this is the mode best suited  
for adjusting multiple screens. This setting can also be changed while the projector is being used. To change the setting,  
choose LOC with the 5/cursors and choose the level with the 2/3cursors.  
* “Lamp replacement” appears on the screen when the lamp use time exceeds 2000 hours.  
2
Insert the main plug of the supplied  
power cord into a suitable wall outlet.  
Power cord (supplied)  
The lamp replacement time is different for the 3 modes.  
1: NORMAL MODE (Normal) ... 1000 hours  
2: LIGHT POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC) ... 2000 hours  
3: LIGHT OUTPUT CONTROL MODE (LOC) ... 2000 hours  
* These lamp replacement times are only a rough guide as to how long the lamp will last if these modes are used from the  
beginning. These are not guaranteed service lives.  
Notes  
CAUTIONS  
• Although the LIGHT OUTPUT CONTROL MODE (LOC) and LIGHT POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC) electrically control  
the brightness of the lamp and extend the replacement time longer than that for the NORMAL MODE, the service life of the  
lamp is approximately 1000 hours.  
CAUTIONS  
To prevent fire and electric shock, observe the  
following:  
• Since the power requirement of the projector is high, insert  
• The lamp will gradually become less bright in each mode.  
Since the lamp may become less bright quickly in some usage environments, replace the lamp if you notice that it is no  
longer bright even if the lamp has not yet reached the end of its life.  
• When you do not use devices, pull out their power cords  
from wall outlets.  
• Do not connect the devices with power cords other than  
those supplied.  
• Mode settings  
* If the projector is not put in stand-by mode or turned off after the lamp has been used continuously in the normal mode for  
more than 1000 hours (but less than 2010 hours), it can be used for “up to 2010 hours”.  
However, if the projector is put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can not be turned back on again.  
* If the projector is put in stand-by mode or turned off after the lamp has been used in the light output control mode or light  
power control mode for more than 2000 hours (but less than 2010 hours), it can not be turned back on again.  
However, if the projector is not put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can be used for “up to 2010 hours”.  
* If the projector is used in the light output control mode or light power control mode for more than 1000 hours, and then  
switched to the normal mode, put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can not be turned back on again.  
• Do not use mains voltage other than the power voltage  
indicated.  
• Do not scar, damage, or work on the power cords. Also, do  
not put a heavy object on, heat, or stretch the power cords,  
otherwise they may be damaged.  
for European  
for United Kingdom  
continent countries  
the power plug directly into a wall outlet.  
• Use the supplied power cord with the ferrite core only.  
• Do not remove the ferrite core from the supplied power  
cord; Otherwise, there may be a possibility that a harmful  
interference occurs.  
• Do not insert or pull out the plugs with a wet hand.  
After performing the above settings, perform the necessary settings.  
Removing the Lens Cap  
Remove the lens cap before using the projector.  
Notes  
• The lens cap is supplied with the lens unit (optional). It  
should be attached to the lens when the projector is not  
used.  
• Do not operate the projector with the lens cap attached.  
Doing so can deform the lens cap because of the heat. A  
metallic lens cap can get hot and cause injury.  
30  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
I
A
R
E
P
D
I
[Screen display]  
OFF [‡  
                                                                                       
]:The MAIN POWER switch turns off and the  
STAND BY indicator goes off.  
Projector  
Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
I Projector’s buttons  
The following describes the basic procedure for normal use  
of the projector.  
I Projector’s buttons  
2. Select the Input source to be Projected  
Press the VIDEO button or the PC button to switch the input.  
• Each time you press either button, the selected input  
changes as follows. The selected name appears on the top  
right of the image on the screen for five seconds. (Called  
line display.)  
STAND BY indicator  
OPERATE indicator  
STAND BY  
STAND BY  
LAMP  
TEMP  
1. Turning on the Power  
LAMP  
TEMP  
OPERATE  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
OPERATE button  
HIDE  
1
Turn on the MAIN POWER switch.  
ON [ I ]:The main power turns on and the STAND BY  
PC  
PC  
PC button  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
VIDEO  
MENU  
When selecting an image device connected to the  
AV IN (VIDEO, Y/C or COMP) terminal:  
indicator comes on.  
VIDEO  
MENU  
VIDEO button  
Projector’s indicator  
Projector  
Press VIDEO.  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
EXIT  
ENTER  
The input mode changes as follows every time the button is  
pressed.  
VIDEO Y/C COMP  
Remote control unit  
Press the “VIDEO”, “Y/C” or “COMP” button.  
EXIT  
ENTER  
2
Press the OPERATE button for one  
second or more.  
• The OPERATE indicator lights and the projected  
screen slowly appears.  
I Remote control unit  
R
E
T
N
E
O
E
U N  
D I  
E
M
C
P
V
X
E
E
T
O
T
E
S E  
E
N
O
T
R
P
P
M
E
T
E
H
S Y E  
K
P
M
A
L
N
W
O
D
P
U
VIDEO: The image from the VIDEO input terminal on the  
side of the unit is projected.  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
Y/C:  
The image from the Y/C input terminal on the side of  
the unit is projected.  
OPERATE  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
or  
PC button  
HIDE  
COMP: The image from the COMP (Y, RB/B-Y, PR/R-Y)  
input terminal on the side of the unit is projected.  
* When there is no signal from the selected input terminal  
(No signal), “No Input” is displayed.  
W
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
S
VIDEO  
Y/C  
VIDEO button  
ZOOM button  
PC1  
PC2  
DVI  
Notes  
T
T
ZOOM  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
W
W
• After the power is turned on, the image may be jumbled for  
a few seconds, but this is not a malfunction.  
• After the indicator comes on, it can take a minute or so for  
the lamp to warm up and operate consistently.  
PRESET  
When selecting a device such as a computer  
which is connected to the PC1, PC2 or DVI  
terminal:  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Projector  
Press PC.  
I Turning off the Power  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
The input mode changes as follows every time the button is  
pressed.  
PC1 PC2 DVI  
Remote control unit  
1
Press the OPERATE button for one  
second or more.  
• The STAND BY indicator changes to blinking, and the  
projector goes into cool-down mode. The cool-down  
mode will continue for approximately 120 seconds.  
I Remote control unit  
I Language display  
Press the “PC1”, “PC2” or “DVI” button.  
The display languages of the menus, direct buttons  
(DIGITAL ZOOM, KEYSTONE, etc) and messages is set to  
“ENGLISH” when the projector is bought. The display  
language can be selected from the following 6 languages:  
PC1: The image from the PC1 input terminal on the side of  
the unit is projected.  
PC2: The image from the PC2 input terminal on the side of  
the unit is projected.  
Remote control unit  
Projector (Blinking)  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
OPERATE button  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
W
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
S
VIDEO  
Y/C  
(Japanese)”, “English (English)”, “Deutsch  
PC1  
PC2  
DVI  
DVI: The image from the DVI input terminal on the side of  
the unit is projected.  
* When there is no signal from the selected input terminal  
(No signal), “No Input” is displayed.  
(German)”, “Español (Spanish)”, “Italiano (Italian)” and  
“Français (French)”. (Refer to page 46.) However, some  
words (VIDEO, NTSC, Quick Alignment, etc) are only  
displayed in English.  
T
T
ZOOM  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
W
W
PRESET  
Note  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
• The OPERATE button will not work for approximately 1  
minute from when the light-source lamp is turned on. Use  
the button after approximately 1 minute.  
EXIT  
ENTER  
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
S
VIDEO  
PC  
PC1  
PC2  
DVI  
Y/C  
VIDEO  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
2
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch after  
the STAND BY indicator changes to  
steady on.  
Line Display  
VIDEO  
PC 1  
PC 2  
Y/C  
COMP  
DVI  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
VIDEO  
* To show the line display (Y/C, VIDEO, COMP, PC1, PC2 or  
DVI) or not is selectable by the menu. Refer to “Setting and  
Adjusting Other Functions (OPTIONS)” on page 54.  
CAUTION  
• Do not turn off the MAIN POWER switch during cool-down  
mode (the STAND BY indicator blinking). Turn it off after  
the STAND BY indicator becomes on (stand-by mode).  
Note  
• When no image signal is input to the selected input  
terminal, the message “No Input” is displayed on the  
screen. (Refer to page 67.)  
33  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
I Projector’s buttons  
I Projector’s buttons  
3. Adjust the Screen Size (Zooming)  
Turning off Image (HIDE)  
How to adjust the projected screen size differs depending on  
the lens unit (optional) you are using.  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
Video image can be temporarily turned off.  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
LAMP  
TEMP  
LAMP  
TEMP  
Press the HIDE button once:  
Video image instantly turn off.  
HIDE  
HIDE  
HIDE  
GL-M2910G (without zooming function):  
The projected screen size cannot be changed.  
button  
PC  
PC  
Press the HIDE button again:  
Video image come on again.  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
KEYSTONE  
buttons  
GL-M2915SG/GL-M2920ZG/GL-M2930SZG (with  
zooming function):  
VIDEO  
MENU  
VIDEO  
MENU  
/
Remote control unit  
Projector  
Adjust the projected screen size with the following buttons on  
the remote control unit.  
HIDE  
PRESET button  
EXIT button  
PRESET  
button  
HIDE  
Note  
EXIT  
button  
EXIT  
ENTER  
EXIT  
ENTER  
• The function of GL-M2915SG is to adjust the view angle  
zooming by 2%. (For fine view angle adjustment)  
Note  
I Remote control unit  
• When the projected image input is changed, the HIDE  
function is canceled and the image return.  
To enlarge the projected screen size  
Press the ZOOM W (Wide) button.  
I Remote control unit  
To reduce the screen size  
Press the ZOOM T (Tele) button.  
Removing the Trapezoidal Distortion of  
the Image  
HIDE button  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
Remote control unit  
OPERATE  
T
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
HIDE  
If the image projected on the screen is distorted in trapezoid  
form, correct it with the KEYSTONE buttons on the projector.  
When the KEYSTONE button is pressed, “Keystone”  
appears on the screen together with the level bar and set  
value (–80 to 128). When “15 sec.” is displayed in the menu,  
“Keystone” will appear in approximately 15 seconds.  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
W
OPERATE  
W
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
S
HIDE  
W
PC1  
PC2  
T
DVI  
SCREEN W/S button  
SCREEN FREEZE  
COMP  
DVI  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
S
KEYSTONE  
4. Adjust Focus  
T
ZOOM  
PC1  
PC2  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
/
buttons  
FOCUS +/– button  
ZOOM T/W button  
W
W
T
T
ZOOM  
PRESET  
Adjust focus with the following buttons on the remote control unit.  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET button  
W
W
PRESET  
To focus on farther points:  
Press the FOCUS + button.  
PRESET button  
EXIT button  
Keystone  
123  
EXIT button  
EXIT  
ENTER  
To focus on nearer points:  
Press the FOCUS – button.  
When you press the KEYSTONE  
The trapezoid form is corrected as shown in the figure.  
When you press the KEYSTONE button:  
The top bottom inverted trapezoid form is corrected as  
shown in the figure.  
button:  
EXIT  
ENTER  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Remote control unit  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
FOCUS  
* To cancel correction and restore the original screen, press  
the PRESET button. (Adjusted value:0)  
* Press the EXIT button to immediately remove the keystone  
display.  
5. Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio  
Set in accordance with the screen aspect ratio that will be  
used. When a screen aspect ratio of 16:9 is used, a 4:3  
image can be projected within the screen without using the  
zoom function.  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
KEYSTONE  
KEYSTONE  
When using a 16:9 screen:  
Press the “W” button.  
When using a 4:3 screen:  
Press the “S” button.  
Projected image with trapezoidal distortion  
Remote control unit  
W
SCREEN  
S
KEYSTONE  
* There is no button on the unit.  
* This setting can also be performed from the menu. (Refer  
to page 46.)  
• When using a screen with a 16:9 aspect ratio  
KEYSTONE  
When set to “S” (4:3)  
* If a 4:3 image is projected, some  
parts of the top and bottom of the  
image may not be displayed.  
Notes  
• The trapezoidal distortion (keystone) can be adjusted from  
the option menu. (Refer to page 54.)  
• The range of the trapezoidal distortion adjustment is  
approximately 20° in the vertical direction.  
When set to “W” (16:9)  
• Interference patterns may appear on the screen when  
adjusting the keystone. This is not a malfunction.  
• Depending on the type of signal, some noise may appear in  
the picture when the keystone is adjusted.  
* A 4:3 image will be displayed in full  
in the middle of the screen.  
This is not a malfunction.  
34  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
I Remote control unit  
I Remote control unit  
Displaying a Still Picture (FREEZE)  
Quick Alignment Function  
(QUICK ALIGN.)  
While projecting an image, a still picture is obtained at any  
time by using the FREEZE button on the remote control.  
The Quick Alignment function automatically adjusts (sets)  
the screen settings of the image input from the PC1, PC2 or  
DVI input terminals. This can only be performed from the  
remote control.  
When you press the FREEZE button:  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
“FREEZE” appears on the screen for a few seconds and  
then the still picture is shown on the screen. Refer to the  
FREEZE message shown on the left of this page.  
* To forcibly clear “FREEZE”, press the EXIT button.  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
QUICK ALIGN.  
W
HIDE  
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
W
button  
S
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
FREEZE button  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
PC1  
PC2  
T
DVI  
S
PC1  
PC2  
T
DVI  
While projecting an image on the screen, press the QUICK  
ALIGN. button on the remote control.  
Quick alignment is conducted to obtain best image.  
* During the automatic alignment, “Quick Alignment” appears  
on the screen, and then disappears when the alignment is  
completed.  
DIGITAL ZOOM  
T/W button  
When you press the FREEZE button again.  
The original image resumes.  
T
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
T
ZOOM  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
W
W
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
W
W
PRESET button  
EXIT button  
PRESET  
Remote control unit  
FREEZE  
Cursor buttons  
5// 2/3  
EXIT  
ENTER  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Remote control unit  
Notes  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
• During freezing, the picture sent from the signal source is  
lost.  
• If any of the inoperative buttons (“MENU”, “QUICK ALIGN.”,  
“KEYSTONE”) are pressed while displaying a still picture,  
“FREEZE” is displayed on the screen.  
• This function will not work with some signal sources  
(UXGA, etc). In this case, the FREEZE inhibit message  
appears for a few seconds, as shown on the left. To forcibly  
clear this message, press the EXIT button.  
FREEZE message  
[Screen display]  
FREEZE  
Zooming a Part of the Image  
(DIGITAL ZOOM T/W)  
Q u i c k A l i g n m e n t  
A part of the image being projected can be digitally magnified up  
to four times. When the DIGITAL ZOOM T or W button is  
pressed, “Digital zoom” appears on the screen together with the  
FREEZE inhibit message  
level bar and magnifying power (  
2.5, 3.2, 4.0). When “15 sec.” is displayed in the menu,  
“Digital zoom” will appear in approximately 15 seconds.  
×1.0,  
×1.2,  
×1.4,  
×1.6,  
×2.0,  
×
×
×
Notes  
Digital zoom  
1.2  
• This only works for the signals input from the PC1, PC2 or  
DVI input terminals. It does not work for the signals input  
from the AV IN terminal (VIDEO, Y/C or COMP input  
terminal).  
• The quick alignment function is used to automatically adjust  
the “Horizontal and vertical position”, “Phase” and  
“Tracking” of the projected image.  
• To zoom up or zoom down, press the DIGITAL ZOOM T or  
W button on the remote control.  
FREEZE  
Remote control unit  
T
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
W
• When using the quick alignment function to automatically  
adjust the image, use a bright, still-picture. It may not  
function correctly on a dark or motion picture. If the results  
obtained with the quick alignment function are not  
satisfactory, manually adjust the “Horizontal and vertical  
position”, “Phase” and “Tracking” of the projected image.  
DIGITAL ZOOM inhibit message  
Moving the zoomed image:  
While “Digital zoom” appears on the screen, you can move  
the zoomed image with the cursor (5//2/3) button on the  
remote control.  
5: Upper part of the image will be  
displayed.  
: Lower part of the image will be  
displayed.  
D.ZOOM  
2: Left side part of the image will  
be displayed.  
3: Right side part of the image  
will be displayed.  
Notes  
• This function will not work with some signal sources  
(UXGA, etc). In this case, the DIGITAL ZOOM inhibit  
message appears for a few seconds, as shown on the left.  
To forcibly clear this message, press the EXIT button.  
• The quality of the zoomed image reduces in comparison  
with the original one.  
• To return to the original size ( 1.0) and original position,  
×
press the PRESET button while “Digital zoom” is displayed  
on the screen.  
37  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
You can adjust picture quality, set functions, get information on the input video signal, etc. using the menus. From the  
following menu transition diagrams, you can see the overall menus and basic button operation in menu mode. Note that there  
are three menu modes, No signal menu mode, video menu mode and PC menu mode. When the MENU button is pressed,  
the projector enters one of these modes by judging the input signal being received.  
I Menu Transition Diagram in Video Menu Mode  
Main menu in Video Menu Mode  
Submenus in Video Menu Mode  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Press 2/3to select Yes or No.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Then, press ENTER to execute.  
I Menu Transition Diagram in No signal Menu Mode  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Image adj.  
This is displayed if there is no signal from the selected input terminal.  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
12  
12  
12  
12  
1
Image adj.  
Contrast  
3or  
Set up  
Brightness  
Color  
All reset?  
Main menu in No signal Menu Mode  
Submenus in No signal Menu Mode  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Color temp.  
Options  
Tint  
Yes  
No  
Tint  
Sharpness  
All reset  
EXIT  
Language  
Information  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set the value.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Menu  
5
Press ENTER to select an item.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
5
Press 5// 2/3 to move the video screen/menu position.  
Set up  
Position  
Menu  
Set up  
Position  
1
3or ENTER  
Sync level  
Low  
Std  
High  
Position  
Gamma  
Image adj.  
Set up  
ENTER  
Set up  
Sync level  
3or  
ENTER  
Down  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
Tracking  
Deinterlace  
Phase  
Sync timing  
Sync timing  
ENTER  
Disp.Posi.  
12,12  
Menu  
Color temp.  
Options  
Cinema  
4:3  
Up  
Gamma  
EXIT  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
16:9  
Options  
ENTER  
ENTER  
EXI  
T
Language  
Information  
ENTER  
ENTER  
EXIT  
EXIT  
Screen  
HDTV  
Language  
Information  
Page  
2
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
ENTER  
Press 5/to select an item.  
5
Set up  
1
Decoder  
ENT  
Press 5/to select an item.  
5
Position  
ENTER  
Down  
ER  
AUTO  
NTSC  
[
NTSC  
]
Gamma  
Cinema  
4:3  
Up  
Menu  
Language  
5
Aspect ratio  
16:9  
NTSC4.43  
PAL  
Page  
2
ENTER  
3or  
SECAM  
Set up  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
ENTER  
Set up  
Tracking  
2
123  
12  
Options  
Phase  
Screen  
HDTV  
4:3  
16:9  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
1080i  
1035i  
Page  
1
ENTER  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Set up  
2
*
The film function is  
Deinterlace  
Phase  
Video Film  
AUTO  
Press 5/to select an item.  
displayed when the  
input signal is  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
5
12  
Menu  
4:3  
16:9  
1035i  
Screen  
HDTV  
Color temp.  
equivalent to NTSC  
or PAL. The tracking  
function is displayed  
for other signals.  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Color temp.  
RED  
ENTER  
3or  
Menu  
1080i  
Color temp.  
RED  
Low  
Middle  
High  
ENTER  
Page  
1
ENTER  
GREEN  
BLUE  
Color temp.  
Options  
123  
123  
123  
GREEN  
BLUE  
Input  
PC1  
CH.0  
Call reset  
Language  
Information  
Set up  
EXIT  
Switcher  
EXIT  
All reset  
ENTER  
E
N
Press 5/to select an item.  
T
E
R
Press 5/to select an item.  
Options  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Color temp.  
5
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Language  
Information  
Menu  
Options  
E
N
Lamp time  
123 h  
All reset?  
T
Menu display  
15sec  
5sec  
ON  
ON  
Menu display  
Line display  
Image adj.  
Set up  
3or  
ENTER Line display  
E
R
OFF  
OFF  
Yes  
No  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
Color temp.  
Options  
Lamp time display  
Lamp control  
Keystone  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Lamp control  
I Quick Reference Guide for No signal Menu Mode  
Page  
2
ENTER  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Main Menu in No signal Menu Mode  
Set up  
You can see the information.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Language  
5
Keystone  
123  
Menu  
Sync level:  
Low. Std*. High.  
3-5  
ENTER  
Sync timing:  
3or  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Lamp control  
ENTER  
English  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
Options  
Color temp.  
Options  
Deutsch  
Español  
Normal  
Flip H:  
Flip V:  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
LPC  
LOC  
EXIT  
Language  
Information  
Italiano  
RS-232C [bps]: Selectable baud rate (transmission speed). 9600 / 19200*  
Français  
Sleep time [min]: Selectable sleep times. If no-signal condition continues for the period of selected time  
5
(Unit: Minutes), the projector enters the stand-by mode. 15 / 30 / 60 / OFF*  
Language  
Japanese / English* / German / Spanish / Italian / French  
Information  
Language for on-screen display.  
Menu  
Page  
2
Image adj.  
Set up  
Input  
PC1  
CH.0  
Flip  
H
OFF  
ON  
ON  
Switcher  
Source  
Flip V  
OFF  
9600  
30  
Color temp.  
Options  
NTSC  
Input:  
Shows the terminal name selected by the VIDEO or PC button. (Y/C, VIDEO, COMP,  
RS-232C [bps]  
Sleep time [min]  
19200  
60 OFF  
15  
PC1, PC2 or DVI)  
Language  
Information  
Lamp time  
123  
h
Page  
1
ENTER  
Switcher:  
Lamp time:  
Has no meaning. This display currently has no meaning. (“CH.0” is usually displayed to  
indicate that it is not being used.)  
Accumulated used hours of the light-source lamp.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Note  
• The display languages of the menus are set to “English” when the projector is  
bought. The display language can be selected from the following 6 languages:  
(Japanese)”, “English (English)”, “Deutsch (German)”, “Español (Spanish)”,  
“Italiano (Italian)” and “Français (French)”. (Refer to page 46.)  
The language settings in the section are explained in “English”.  
38  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
.
I Menu Transition Diagram in PC Menu Mode  
I
Quick Reference Guide for Video Menu Mode  
Main menu in PC Menu Mode  
Submenus in PC Menu Mode  
Main Menu in Video Menu Mode (While receiving video-device-related signals)  
Image adj. (Refer to page 49)  
Press 2/3to select Yes or No.  
Then, press ENTER to execute.  
Contrast:  
Brightness:  
Color:  
Contrast of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Brightness of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Color density of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Tint of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Sharpness of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–5 to +5, 0*)  
Resets above items to the factory set values.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Image adj.  
Contrast  
Tint:  
Sharpness:  
All reset:  
3or  
Image adj.  
Set up  
EXIT  
All reset?  
Brightness  
ENTER  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Color temp.  
Options  
Contrast  
12  
12  
ENTER  
Yes  
No  
Brightness  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
Yes / No  
1
2
3
4
5
ENTER  
Set up 1  
Position:  
5
Video screen position and menu position can be adjusted.  
Disp. Posi. / Menu  
(Refer to page 51)  
Press ENTER to select an item.  
Press 5// 2/3 to move the  
video screen/menu position.  
5
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Image tone can be changed. Down/Cinema*/Up (Suitable for the cinema programes)(Refer to  
Gamma:  
Menu  
Position  
page 52)  
Set up  
1
Image adj.  
Set up  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder:  
Selectable aspect ratio, 4:3*/16:9.  
Selectable color systems, Normally, set to AUTO. (Refer to page 45)  
(This item is displayed only when inputting VIDEO or Y/C.)  
(Refer to page 52)  
Tracking  
Phase  
3or  
ENTER  
Tracking  
123  
12  
ENTER  
Disp.Posi.  
12,12  
Menu  
Color temp.  
Options  
Phase  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
ENTER  
ENTER  
AUTO*/NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/SECAM  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
EXIT  
1:1  
ST  
Panel  
Aspect  
BP  
Page 2 Press ENTER to enter the “Set up 2” submenu  
Tracking: Normally, no adjustment is required. The lateral size and display area of video image can be  
adjusted. (–128 to + 127)  
Deinterlace: Set when watching movies which were recorded on film.  
(Refer to page 47)  
Set up  
1
5
Phase:  
Screen:  
HDTV:  
Page 1:  
Flickering or dim picture image can be adjusted. (0 to 31) (Refer to page 47)  
Selectable screen’s aspect ratio. 4:3*/16:9 (Refer to page 46)  
Position  
Resize  
ENTER  
1:1  
Press 2/3to select Yes or No.  
Panel  
Aspect  
Then, press ENTER to execute.  
Selectable HDTV format. Normally, set to 1080i, 1080i*/1035i  
Press ENTER to return to “Page 1” submenu.  
(Refer to page 46)  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Color temp.  
Menu  
Color temp.  
Color temp.  
Image adj.  
Set up  
EXIT  
3or  
ENTER  
Color temp.  
RED  
Color temp.  
RED  
Low  
Middle  
High  
All reset?  
Color temp.:  
Adjustable color temperature, Low/Middle*/High.  
Will be adjusted to correct reddish or blueish image.  
Adjusts the red level. (0 to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Adjusts the green level. (0 to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Adjusts the blue level. (0 to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Reset above items to the factory set values.  
Color temp.  
Options  
123  
123  
123  
Yes  
No  
GREEN  
BLUE  
GREEN  
BLUE  
RED:  
GREEN:  
BLUE:  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
All reset  
All reset  
ENTER  
ENTER  
All-reset:  
Press 5  
Press 2  
/
to select an item.  
3to set or adjust the value.  
5
Yes/No  
(Refer to page 54)  
/
Keystone  
0
Options  
Options 1  
Menu  
Options  
ENTER  
Menu display  
Line display  
15sec  
5sec  
ON  
ON  
Menu display  
Line display  
Image adj.  
Set up  
3or  
ENTER  
Menu display:  
Line display:  
15sec* (Menu disappears in 15 seconds.) / ON (Menu stays on.)  
5sec* (Line display such as “VIDEO”, “Y/C”, “PC1”, or “PC2” appears on top right of the screen for  
5 seconds when the VIDEO or PC button is pressed.) / OFF (Line display does not appear.)  
OFF  
OFF  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
Color temp.  
Options  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
EXIT  
Lamp control  
ENTER  
ENTER  
EXIT  
Language  
Information  
Lamp control  
Lamp time display:  
ON*:  
OFF:  
Keystone:  
Keystone:  
Page  
2
ENTER  
Displays when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or LOC mode.  
Does not display when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or LOC mode.  
Press ENTER to enter the Keystone submenu.  
Adjust to correct the trapezoidal distortion of the projected image.  
(–80 to +120, 0*)  
ENTER  
Press 5/to  
select an item.  
Language  
5
ENTER  
Menu  
Lamp control  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Normal  
LPC  
Lamp control:  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
Normal*: Used as a normal lamp.  
LPC:  
LOC:  
Color temp.  
Options  
LOC  
Lamp brightness is automatically controlled with time.  
Lamp brightness is controlled in 7 levels (-6 to 0) irrespective of the time. This is set within the menu.  
Press ENTER to enter the “Page 2” submenu.  
Language  
Information  
Page 2:  
Flip H.:  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
Selectable baud rate (transmission speed). 9600 / 19200*  
Selectable sleep times. If no-signal condition continues for the period of  
selected time (Unite: Minutes), the projector enters the stand-by mode. 15 / 30  
/ 60 / OFF*  
Page  
2
Flip V:  
RS-232C [bps]:  
Sleep time [min]:  
5
Flip  
H
OFF  
OFF  
9600  
30  
ON  
Flip V  
ON  
Menu  
RS-232C [bps]  
Sleep time [min]  
19200  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Input  
PC 1  
CH.0  
15  
60 OFF  
Switcher  
Page  
1
ENTER  
Color temp.  
Options  
Resolution  
Frequency  
NTSC  
Page 1:  
Press ENTER to return to the “Page 1” submenu.  
H
79.9 kHz  
75 Hz  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Language  
Japanese / English* / German / Spanish / Italian / French  
Information (Refer to page 56)  
Language for on-screen display.  
(Refer to page 46)  
Frequency V  
Lamp time  
Language  
Information  
123  
h
Input:  
Switcher:  
Shows the terminal name selected by the VIDEO or PC button. (Y/C, VIDEO, COMP, PC1, PC2 or DVI)  
Has no meaning. This display currently has no meaning, (“CH.0” is usually displayed to indicate  
that it is not being used.)  
You can see the information.  
Note  
• The display languages of the menus are set to “English” when the projector is  
bought. The display language can be selected from the following 6 languages:  
Source:  
Shows the projected image’s type of video signal.  
Lamp time:  
Accumulated used hours of the light-source lamp.  
(Japanese)”, “English (English)”, “Deutsch (German)”, “Español  
* : Factory set value.  
(Spanish)”, “Italiano (Italian)” and “Français (French)”. (Refer to page 46.)  
The language settings in the section are explained in “English”.  
41  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Press the cursor button 2  
or adjust the value.  
Remote control unit  
                                                                                                                                                                                          
or 3 to set  
                                                                                                                                                                                               
2
Press the cursor button 5or ∞  
select an item in the main menu.  
                                                                                                                                                    
to  
When an item which has the “ENTER” message has been  
selected in step 4, press the ENTER button to move to the  
next submenu.  
3
Press the cursor button 3  
ENTER button to enter the submenu.  
The submenu corresponding to the item selected in step  
2 is displayed on the screen.  
* When you selected “Information” in step 2, no  
submenu is available.  
                                                                                                                                               
or the  
4
Press the cursor button 5or to  
select an item in the submenu.  
When a “Language” has been selected in step 2, press  
to set the language.  
                                                                                                                                                                                               
Menu Operations  
Quick Reference Guide for PC Menu Mode  
Menu Operations  
I
Basic Menu Operation  
Main Menu in PC Menu Mode (While receiving computer-related signals)  
When the MENU button is pressed, the projector enters Video or PC menu mode by responding to the input signal being  
received.  
Image adj. (Refer to page 49)  
Contrast:  
Contrast of the picture image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Brightness:  
Sharpness:  
All reset:  
Brightness of the picture image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Adjust the outline of letters etc. (1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5, 3*)  
Resets above items to the factory set values.  
Video menu mode:  
Enters this mode when video-device-related signals are  
input from the following devices.  
• Video devices connected to the VIDEO IN (Y/C, VIDEO  
and COMP) terminals.  
Yes / No  
Set up  
Tracking:  
The lateral size and display area of picture image can be adjusted. (–128 to +127)  
(Refer to page 47)  
Flickering or dim picture image can be adjusted. (0 to 31) (Refer to page 47)  
Video screen position and menu position can be adjusted. (Refer to page 51)  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
PC menu mode:  
Enters this mode when computer-related signals are input  
from the following devices.  
Phase:  
Position:  
Disp. Posi. / Menu  
Resize:  
The relationship between the number of pixels (resolution) and the screen can be  
• A computer connected to the PC 1 terminal.  
• A computer connected to the PC 2 terminal, which outputs  
analog RGB, V, H/Cs signals.  
selected. (Refer to page 53)  
“1:1”:  
Picture image is projected with its original size.  
Panel:  
Aspect*:  
Picture image is enlarged to the full size.  
Picture image is enlarged while maintaining the original aspect ratio.  
Selectable clamp position. Normally, set to “BP”. ST / BP*  
• A computer connected to the DVI terminal.  
Clamp:  
Color temp.  
Color temp.:  
1
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu is displayed on the screen.  
Adjustable color temperature, Low/Middle* /High.  
Will be adjusted to correct reddish or blueish image.  
Adjusts the red level. (o to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Adjusts the green level. (o to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Adjusts the blue level. (o to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Reset above items to the factory set values.  
Projector  
Remote control unit  
MENU  
Projector  
RED:  
GREEN:  
BLUE:  
MENU  
All-reset:  
Yes/No  
Options (Refer to page 54)  
Options 1  
Menu display:  
Line display:  
15sec* (Menu disappears in 15 seconds.) / ON (Menu stays on.)  
5sec* (Line display such as “PC1” or “PC2” appears on top right of the screen for 5  
seconds when the VIDEO or PC button is pressed.) / OFF (Line display does not  
appear.)  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
Lamp time display:  
ON*:  
• All reset  
• Position  
• Decoder  
• Keystone  
• Page 1  
(Refer to page 49)  
(Refer to page 51)  
(Refer to page 45)  
(Refer to page 54)  
(Refer to page 54)  
(Refer to page 54)  
Displays when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or LOC mode.  
Does not display when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or LOC  
mode.  
Press ENTER to enter the Keystone submenu.  
Adjust to correct the trapezoidal distortion of the projected image.  
(–80 to +128, 0*)  
OFF:  
Keystone:  
Keystone:  
• Page 2  
To exit the main menu:  
Lamp control:  
Normal*: Used as a normal lamp.  
LPC:  
LOC:  
• While the main menu is displayed, press the MENU button.  
The main menu disappears and the original picture image  
resumes.  
Lamp brightness is aLutomatically controlled with time.  
Lamp brightness is controlled in 7 levels (-6 to 0) irrespective of the time. This is set within  
the menu.  
To exit the submenu:  
Page 2:  
Press ENTER to enter the “Page 2” submenu.  
• While the submenu is displayed, press the EXIT button.  
The menu returns to the previous menu.  
• To exit the menu mode directly, press the MENU button.  
The submenu disappears and the original video image is  
restored.  
Flip H:  
Flip V:  
RS-232C [bps]:  
Sleep time [min]:  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
Selectable baud rate (transmission speed). 9600 / 19200*  
Selectable sleep times. If no-signal condition continues for the  
period of selected time (Unite: Minutes), the projector enters the  
stand-by mode. 15 / 30 / 60 / OFF*  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
Page 1:  
Press ENTER to return to the “Page 1” submenu.  
Language  
Language for on-screen display. (Refer to page 46)  
Japanese / English* / German / Spanish / Italian / French  
Information (Refer to page 56)  
Input:  
Switcher:  
Resolution:  
Shows the terminal name selected by the PC button. (PC1 or PC2)  
This display currently has no meaning. (“CH.0” is usually displayed to indicate that it is not being used.)  
Shows the resolution of the input signal being received. (Horizontal × Vertical)  
It may not be displayed correctly with some input signals.  
Frequency H:  
Frequency V:  
Lamp time:  
Shows the horizontal frequency of the input signal being received. ( kHz)  
Shows the vertical frequency of the input signal being received. ( Hz)  
Accumulated used hours of the light-source lamp.  
* : Factory set value.  
42  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Set up 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                                  
, and press 3 or the ENTER button.  
                                                                                                                                                                               
Select “Decoder” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Decoder” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                                    
, and press the ENTER button.  
4
5
Set the color system with the cursor button 5or .  
                                                                                                                                                                       
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Changing the Color System (Video Menu Mode Only)  
This function is available only in Video menu mode.  
Basic Menu Operation (Cont.)  
I
Basic Button Functions in the Menu Mode  
The menu is only displayed when there is a signal for the AV IN (Y/C, VIDEO and COMP) terminal.  
Normally, use the color system in AUTO. If operation in AUTO is unstable, such as color not being shown, set to a dedicated  
color system in accordance with the color system of the video signal being input.  
Button  
MENU  
Function  
Enters the main menu or exits the menu mode.  
Selects an item in the menu. Pressing or 5will scroll the item in the menu.  
Sets or adjusts the value.  
Cursor button 5/∞  
Cursor button 2/3  
PRESET  
1
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
If pressed while the keystone setting submenu is displayed, the value is set to “0”.  
Returns to the previous menu.  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Used to enter the submenu from the main menu.  
Used to enter the next submenu if “ENTER” is displayed in the selected item.  
I Remote control unit  
I Projector  
Video submenus  
STAND BY  
Decoder  
LAMP  
TEMP  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
OPERATE  
Set up 1  
Position  
HIDE  
HIDE  
W
AUTO  
NTSC  
[
NTSC  
]
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
ENTER  
Down Cinema  
4:3  
ENTER  
ENTER  
S
PC  
PC1  
PC2  
T
DVI  
Gamma  
Up  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
T
ZOOM  
NTSC4.43  
PAL  
VIDEO  
MENU  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
Page 2  
16:9  
W
W
ENTER  
EXIT  
PRESET  
PRESET button  
EXIT button  
MENU button  
ENTER button  
PRESET  
button  
MENU  
button  
SECAM  
EXIT  
ENTER  
EXIT  
button  
ENTER  
button  
Cursor buttons  
5// 2/3  
EXIT  
ENTER  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Cursor buttons  
5// 2/3  
AUTO:  
Normally, set to “AUTO”. (Factory set value)  
The color system of a video signal being input is automatically identified and displayed in [ ].  
In [ ], B/W (Black & White), NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL or SECAM will be displayed. (It is not always displayed.)  
For example, AUTO [ NTSC ] shows that the NTSC signal is being received.  
Dedicated to NTSC.  
I Video menu mode  
Video submenu  
Video main menu  
NTSC:  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Contrast  
NTSC4.43:Dedicated to NTSC4.43.  
PAL: Dedicated to PAL.  
SECAM: Dedicated to SECAM.  
12  
Image adj.  
Set up  
3or  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
ENTER  
Brightness  
Color  
12  
Color temp.  
Options  
12  
Tint  
Tint  
12  
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Language  
Information  
Sharpness  
All reset  
1
EXIT  
ENTER  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
I PC menu mode  
PC submenu  
PC main menu  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Contrast  
3or  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Brightness  
ENTER  
Contrast  
12  
12  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Color temp.  
Options  
Brightness  
Sharpness  
All reset  
1
2
3
4
5
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
45  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Language” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Language” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                
, and press 3or the ENTER button.  
                                                                             
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Set up 1” (video mode) or “Set up” submenu appears on the screen.  
In video mode: Select set up 2 with the cursor or 5, and press ENTER button.  
The “Set up 2” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                                  
, and press 3  
                                                                                                                                                                               
or the ENTER button.  
3
4
Set the language with the cursor button 5or .  
                                                              
3
4
Select “Tracking” or “Phase” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
Adjust the tracking or phase with the cursor 2 or 3  
                                                                                                                                                                               
.
                                                                                                                                                                   
                                                                                                                                                                        
.
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Set up 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                             
, and press 3  
                                                                          
or the ENTER button.  
or the ENTER button.  
5
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Select “Set up 2” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Set up 2” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                              
, and press 3  
                                                                           
4
5
Select “Screen” or “HDTV” with the cursor button 5or .  
                                                                        
Adjust the Screen aspect ratio or HDTV format with the cursor button 2  
To adjust multiple items, repeat 4 and 5.  
                                                                                     
or 3.  
                                                                                          
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Changing the Language Display  
Adjusting Tracking/Phase  
The on-screen language is set to “English” when shipped from the factory. When you want to change to another language, set  
it as follows.  
Normally, tracking and phase adjustments are automatically carried out when a video signal is input to the projector for the  
first time, or when the QUICK ALIGN. button on the remote control is pressed.  
However, you can manually adjust the tracking and phase on the menu.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
If a wide stripe appears on the screen, adjust the lateral size of the picture image and the display area (tracking adjustment)  
so the stripe disappears.  
Also, if text projected on the screen appears flickers or appears dim, adjust phase adjustment so it becomes clear.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Language  
:
:
:
:
:
:
Japanese  
English  
German  
Spanish  
Italian  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
Video submenu  
PC submenu  
French  
Set up  
Position  
1
Set up  
Tracking  
2
Set up  
Tracking  
ENTER  
Down  
123  
12  
123  
12  
Gamma  
Cinema Up  
4:3 16:9  
Phase  
Screen  
HDTV  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
4:3  
16:9  
Phase  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
ENTER  
ENTER  
1030i  
1035i  
ENTER  
Page  
2
Page  
1
ENTER  
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
1:1  
ST  
Panel  
Aspect  
BP  
Decoder is only displayed when there is a signal for the AV  
IN terminal.  
Memo  
About language display  
Some words in the menu and messages such as “Quick Alignment”, “Keystone”, “VIDEO” and “NTSC” are shown only in  
English.  
Adjust the tracking and phase of the picture image being projected. To adjust the phase, first check for correct tracking  
adjustment.  
*To adjust multiple items, repeat 3 and 4.  
Changing the Screen aspect ratio/HDTV format (Video Menu  
Mode Only)  
Adjustment item  
Tracking  
Phase  
Button  
2or 3  
2or 3  
Adjustment content  
The picture image shrinks laterally (right-to-left) or extends laterally (left-to-  
right). (–128 +127)  
1
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Set to a position where text appears clear. (0 31)  
Note  
• A dim image could be caused by insufficient adjustment of brightness and contrast. Before adjusting phase, make sure that  
brightness and contrast are correctly adjusted. To adjust them, refer to “Adjusting Picture Quality” on page 49.  
Adjustment item  
Screen  
HDTV  
Button  
Adjustment content  
Select according to the aspect ratio of the screen used.  
2or 3  
4:3  
16:9  
Set the number of effective scanning lines. Normally, select 1080i.  
2or 3  
1080i: 1035i:  
6
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
46  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Image adj.” with the cursor button 5  
The “Image adj.” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                                
or ∞  
                                                                                                                                                                     
, and press 3or the ENTER button.  
                                                                                                                                                                                  
3
4
Select the item to be adjusted with the cursor button 5  
*“Color” and “Tint” are shown in Video submenu only.  
                                                                                                                                                                           
or ∞  
                                                                                                                                                                                
.
Make adjustment with the cursor 2  
                                                                                                                                                        
or 3.  
                                                                                                                                                             
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Adjusting Picture Quality  
Set up for Watching Image Software (Video Menu Mode Only)  
In the “Image adj.” submenu, adjust brightness, contrast, sharpness, etc. to obtain the desired picture quality. Note that the  
adjustment items differ in Video menu mode and PC menu mode.  
This unit has a function which allows you to project movies, which were recorded on film, in the best possible conditions.  
(Function to convert 2-3 pull-down interlace scans to progressive scans)  
Normally use set to AUTO.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
1
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5or , and press 3or the ENTER button.  
The “Set up 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
Video submenu  
PC submenu  
Image adj.  
Select “Set up 2” with the cursor button 5or , and press 3or the ENTER button.  
The “Set up 2” submenu appears on the screen.  
Image adj.  
Contrast  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
12  
12  
12  
12  
1
12  
12  
Brightness  
Sharpness  
All reset  
4
5
Select “Deinterlace” with the cursor button 5or .  
1
2
3
4
5
Select the Deinterlace function mode with the cursor button 2or 3.  
Video: When watching images recorded with a video camera  
Film: When watching images recorded on film  
AUTO: The setting is changed automatically  
Tint  
ENTER  
Sharpness  
All reset  
ENTER  
6
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Note  
• Operates when the signal is an NTSC or PAL interlace signal. Does not operate for other signals. (The menu is not  
displayed when other signals are inputted.)  
*To adjust multiple items, repeat 3 and 4.  
Adjustment item  
Contrast  
Button  
2or 3  
2or 3  
Adjustment content  
Gets lower/higher. (–30 0* +30)  
Gets darker/brighter. (–30 0* +30)  
Brightness  
Color  
Gets softer/deeper. (–30 0* +30)  
2or 3  
2or 3  
(Video menu mode only)  
Gets reddish/greenish. (–30 0* +30)  
Tint  
(Video menu mode only)  
Gets softer/sharper.  
• Video menu mode: (–5 0* +5)  
• PC menu mode: (1 3* 5)  
Sharpness  
2or 3  
Note  
• When in the PC menu mode, if the resize function in the PC submenu is set to  
“1:1”, the image quality will not change even if the value is changed.  
Resets above items to the factory set values. How to operate is mentioned below  
(next page).  
All reset  
ENTER  
* : Factory set value  
I To perform All Reset  
• In the Image adj. submenu, select “All reset” with the cursor button 5or , and press the ENTER button. Then, the “All  
reset” submenu appears on the screen.  
• Press the cursor button 2to select “Yes”, and then press the ENTER button.  
• All items in the “Image adj.” submenu are reset to the factory set values and the menu returns to the previous one.  
To exit the “All reset” submenu without performing All reset, select “No” with the cursor button 3and, press the ENTER  
button.  
(To be continued on the next page)  
49  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5  
The “Set up 1” or “Set up” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                             
or ∞  
                                                                                                                                                                  
, and press 3 or the ENTER button.  
                                                                                                                                                                               
3
Select “Position” with the cursor button 5  
The “Position” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                               
or ∞  
                                                                                                                                                                    
, and press the ENTER button.  
Select “Color temp.” with the cursor button 5  
                                                             
or ∞  
or ∞  
                                                                  
, and press 3 or the ENTER  
                                                                               
3
4
Select “Color temp.” with the cursor button 5  
                                                             
                                                                  
.
Adjust the color temperature with the cursor button 2  
                                                                     
or 3  
                                                                          
.
Horizontal position  
5
6
Select “RED” or “GREEN” or “BLUE” with the cursor button 5or .  
                                                                                  
Fine adjust the color temperature with the cursor button 2  
                                                                         
or 3.  
                                                                              
Press the cursor button 5  
                                                                                                                                               
, ∞  
                                                                                                                                                  
, 2  
                                                                                                                                                     
or 3 to move the video screen (display) or the  
                                                                                                                                                          
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
.
Adjusting the Video Screen/Menu Position  
Image adj.  
The position of the video screen and the menu on the video screen can be adjusted. You can finely adjust the video screen  
position. The menu will move widely on the video screen.  
All reset?  
Yes  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
No  
Video submenu (“Set up 1” submenu)  
PC submenu (Set up submenu)  
5
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Set up  
Set up 1  
Tracking  
Phase  
123  
12  
Position  
Gamma  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
Page 2  
ENTER  
Down Cinema  
4:3  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Memo  
Up  
In some adjustments, the level bar changes according to the set value. (The setting value is also displayed at the left of the  
level bar.)  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
ENTER  
16:9  
1:1  
ST  
Panel  
Aspect  
BP  
Adjusting Color temperature  
Decoder is only displayed when there is a  
signal for the AV IN terminal.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Position  
button.  
The “Color temp.” submenu appears on the screen.  
Disp.Posi.  
Menu  
12,12  
ENTER  
Low:  
Middle:  
High:  
Color temperature decreases (image becoming reddish).  
Results in middle color temperature. (Factory set position).  
Color temperature increases (image becoming blueish).  
Vertical position  
4
5
Press the ENTER button to select “Disp.Posi.” or “Menu”.  
Disp.Posi. (Display Position):The video screen position (display position) can be adjusted.  
To adjust multiple items, repeat 5 and 6.  
Menu:The menu position can be adjusted.  
Adjustment item  
RED  
Button  
2or 3  
2or 3  
2or 3  
Adjustment content  
Adjusts the red level. (0 to 255)  
menu.  
*Repeat 4 and 5 to move both video screen (display) and menu positions.  
GREEN  
BLUE  
Adjusts the green level. (0 to 255)  
Adjusts the blue level. (0 to 255)  
Adjustment item  
Button  
2or 3  
5or ∞  
2or 3  
5or ∞  
Adjustment content  
The video screen moves to the left or right. (–30 +30)  
The video screen moves up or down. (–30 +30)  
The menu moves to the left or right. (Left, center*, right)  
The menu moves up or down. (Top, center*, bottom)  
I To perform All Reset  
• In the Color temp. submenu, select “All reset” with the cursor button 5or , and press the ENTER button. Then, the “All  
reset” submenu appears on the screen.  
• Press the cursor button 2to select “Yes”, and then press the ENTER button.  
• All items in the Color temp. submenu are reset to the factory set values and the menu returns to the previous one.  
To exit the “All reset” submenu without performing All reset, select “No” with the cursor button 3and, press the ENTER  
button  
Disp.Posi. - H  
Disp.Posi. - V  
Menu - H  
Menu - V  
* : Factory set value  
7
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
6
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
50  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
                                                                                                                                                                   
or ∞  
                                                                                                                                                                        
, and press 3 or the ENTER  
                                                                                                                                                                                     
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5  
The “Set up 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                        
or ∞  
                                                             
, and press 3 or the ENTER button.  
                                                                          
                                                                                                                                                                   
                                                                                                                                                                        
.
3
4
Select “Gamma” or “Aspect ratio” with the cursor button 5  
                                                                          
or .  
                                                                               
Adjust the image tone or aspect ratio with the cursor 2  
*To adjust multiple items, repeat 3 and 4.  
                                                                      
or 3.  
                                                                           
                                                                                                                                                                                        
                                                                                                                                                                                             
.
5
                                                                                                                                                                   
or ∞  
                                                                                                                                                                        
, and press 3 or the ENTER  
                                                                                                                                                                                     
5
                                                                                                                                                                   
or ∞  
Choose “ST” or “BP” with the cursor  
button 2or 3  
                                                                                                                                                                        
.
                                                                                                                                                                          
                                                                                                                                                                               
.
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Changing the Image Size - Resize Function (PC Menu Mode Only)  
Changing the Image Gamma/Aspect Ratio (Video Menu Mode Only)  
The image Gamma (Down, Cinema or Up) and the aspect ratio (4:3 or 16:9) are selectable in Video menu mode.  
The picture image projected can be selectable with the  
1
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Resize function which is available only in PC menu mode.  
You can choose the video image size projected from the  
following: (Factory setting is “Aspect”.)  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
2
Select “Set up” with the cursor button  
“1:1”: The image is displayed at the input resolution. The  
picture image projected is not enlarged even if its  
number of pixels (resolution) is smaller than that of  
the projector’s D-ILA element (1365 pixels × 1024  
pixels).  
button.  
The “Set up” submenu appears on the screen.  
PC submenu  
Video submenu  
Resize: 1:1  
Set up  
Tracking  
Set up 1  
123  
12  
Position  
Gamma  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
Page 2  
ENTER  
Down  
Full size (1365 × 1024)  
Phase  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
Cinema  
4:3  
Up  
ENTER  
16:9  
1:1  
ST  
Panel  
Aspect  
BP  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Image not enlarged  
3
4
5
Select “Resize” with the cursor button  
5 or ∞  
Decoder is only displayed when there is a signal for the Video IN terminal.  
Panel: The picture image projected is virtually enlarged to  
the full size (1365 pixels × 1024 pixels). The  
horizontal and vertical enlargement ratio will differ  
depending on the original image and the image will  
be deformed.  
Choose “1:1”, “Panel”, or “Aspect”  
with the cursor button 2 or 3  
Resize: Panel  
Press the EXIT button to return to the  
previous menu or press the MENU  
button to exit the menu mode.  
Adjustment item  
Button  
Adjustment content  
The image Gamma projected on the screen can be changed.  
Image enlarged  
to the full size  
(1365 × 1024)  
Down: Suitable for projegctin the video programs.  
Cinema* : Normally use in this mode.  
Up : Suitable for projecting the cinema programs.  
Gamma  
2or 3  
Changing the Clamp pulse position  
(PC Menu Mode Only)  
When the image is too dark or bright, or when the image is  
unstable, switching the position may improve the image  
quality. Normally, set to “BP”.  
Image not enlarged  
(Original image)  
Sets the vertical-to-horizontal ratio (4:3 or 16:9) of the video image projected.  
“4:3*” : The aspect ratio of the projected image becomes 4:3. Set it to 4:3 for video  
of NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL, SECAM.  
Aspect ratio  
2or 3  
Aspect:While maintaining the original aspect ratio, the video  
image projected is virtually enlarged until either the  
horizontal or vertical side reaches the full size (1365  
pixels × 1024 pixels).  
“16:9” : The aspect ratio of projected image becomes 16:9. Set it to 16:9 for Hi-  
Vision devices (W-VHS VCR, etc.).  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
* : Factory set value  
Resize: Aspect  
Image enlarged to the aspect size.  
(Example: aspect ratio is 16:9)  
Select “Set up” with the cursor button  
5
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Full size (1365 × 1024)  
button.  
The “Set up” submenu appears on the screen.  
3
4
5
Select “Clamp” with the cursor button  
Image not enlarged (original image)  
(Example: aspect ratio is 16:9)  
Image enlarged to the aspect size.  
(Example: aspect ratio is 5:4)  
Press the EXIT button to return to the  
previous menu or press the MENU  
button to exit the menu mode.  
Full size (1365 × 1024)  
ST: Sync Tip BP: Back Porch  
Image not enlarged  
(original image)  
(Example: aspect ratio is 5:4)  
53  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Options” with the cursor button 5  
The “Options 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                         
or ∞  
                                                              
, and press 3 or the ENTER button.  
                                                                           
3
4
Select the item to be adjusted with the cursor button 5  
Make adjustment with the cursor 2 or 3  
• While the keystone item is selected, press the ENTER button to display the “Keystone” submenu.  
• To enter the “Page 2” submenu, select “Page 2” with the cursor button 5or , and press the ENTER button.  
• To return to the “Page 1” submenu from the “Page 2” submenu, select “Page 1” with the cursor button5or , and press  
the ENTER button.  
                                                                      
or ∞  
                                                                          
.
To exit the keystone submenu, press the EXIT button.  
                                                   
                                                        
.
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Setting and Adjusting Other Functions (OPTIONS)  
Various functions are provided as shown in the “Options 1” and “Options 2” submenus.  
You can set or adjust each function, as required.  
Adjustment item  
Button  
Adjustment content  
Sets whether to clear the menu display automatically or not.  
15sec* : Clears the display automatically in about 15 seconds.  
Menu display  
2or 3  
ON  
: Does not automatically clear the menu display.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Sets whether to show the line display (Y/C, VIDEO, COMP, PC1, PC2 or DVI) on top  
right of the screen or not when the VIDEO or PC button is pressed.  
5sec* : Shows the line display for about 5 seconds.  
Line display  
2or 3  
OFF : Does not show the line display.  
Displays the lamp use time.  
ON* : Displays when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or  
Options 1  
Lamp time display  
2or 3  
LOC mode.  
Menu display  
Line display  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
15sec  
5sec  
ON  
ON  
OFF : Does not display when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the  
LPC or LOC mode.3  
OFF  
OFF  
Press the ENTER button to enter the keystone submenu.  
In the keystone submenu, press 2or 3to correct trapezoidal distortion of the  
projected image. (–80 0* +128)  
To reset the keystone (trapezoidal distortion of the picture image) to the original  
setting (factory set value: 0), press the PRESET button when the “Keystone”  
submenu appears on the screen.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Lamp control  
Page 2  
Keystone  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Press ENTER to enter the lamp control submenu.  
Normal* : Used as a normal lamp.  
LPC  
: Automatically controls the power used by the lamp and increases it in  
steps. When this mode is used, the brightness starts at approximately  
70%. The decrease in brightness is slower than in “Normal” mode and this  
mode is best suited when using the projector continuously for long periods  
of time.  
Lamp control  
ENTER  
Keystone  
123  
* “Lamp replacement” appears on the screen when the lamp use time  
exceeds 2000 hours.  
LOC  
: The brightness can be set in seven levels (-6 to 0). Since the brightness  
can be set in steps, this is the mode best suited for adjusting multiple  
screens. This setting can also be changed while the projector is being  
used. To change the setting, choose LOC with the 5/cursors and  
choose the level with the 2/3cursors.  
Options  
ENTER  
Lamp control  
Menu display  
Line display  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
15sec  
5sec  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
Normal  
Reverses image right-to-left.  
Flip H  
2or 3  
2or 3  
OFF* : For the front method.  
ON : For upside-down hanging from the ceiling.  
LPC  
LOC  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Lamp control  
Page 2  
Inverses image upside-down.  
OFF* : For normal setup.  
Flip V  
ENTER  
ON : For upside-down hanging from the ceiling.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Sets the baud rate for transmission.  
RS-232C [bps]  
2or 3  
2or 3  
9600  
: 9600 bps  
ENTER  
19200* : 19200 bps  
Page 2  
Sets the length of sleep time which automatically brings the projector into stand-by  
state. You can select one of the sleep times: 15, 30, 60 and 0 (OFF*) minutes.  
Flip H  
OFF  
OFF  
9600  
30  
ON  
ON  
Sleep time [min]  
Flip V  
* Factory set value  
RS-232C [bps]  
Sleep time [min]  
Page 1  
19200  
60 OFF  
15  
ENTER  
5
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
*To adjust multiple items, repeat 3 to 4.  
*To reset the keystone (trapezoidal distortion of the picture image) to the original setting, press the PRESET button when  
the “Keystone” submenu appears on the screen.  
Note  
• Refer to “Removing the Trapezoidal Distortion of the Image” on page 35 for more details about adjusting the keystone.  
54  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Information” with the cursor button 5  
The “Information” will be displayed in the main menu.  
*No submenu can be selected.  
                                                             
or .  
                                                                  
Replacing the Fuse  
Menu Operations  
A fuse is used to protect the power source of the projector. If the fuse is blown, replace it. When the power switch is turned on  
but no power is supplied to the projector, check the fuse. If there are any unclear points, contact the dealer where you  
purchased your projector, or consult the Service center.  
Getting Information  
You can get information on the input signal, accumulated used hours of light-source lamp, etc.  
CAUTION  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
When replacing the fuse, use the same rating and type (12 A 250 V). Otherwise, a fire may occur and/or the projector may  
be damaged.  
1
Turn off the main power switch and  
disconnect the power cord from both  
the projector and the wall outlet.  
In stand-by state (the STAND BY indicator lights on),  
place the MAIN POWER switch of OFF [ ] position.  
Video main menu  
PC main menu  
2
Loosen the fuse holder to remove it.  
To loosen the fuse holder, use a Phillips screwdriver.  
Menu  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Setting  
Image adj.  
Setting  
Input  
VIDEO  
CH.0  
Input  
PC 1  
CH.0  
Switcher  
Source  
Switcher  
Color temp.  
Options  
Color temp.  
Options  
NTSC  
Resolution 1280 1024  
Frequency H  
Frequency V  
Lamp time  
79.9 kHz  
75 Hz  
Language  
Information  
Language  
Information  
Lamp time  
123 h  
123  
h
Fuse holder  
Phillips screwdriver  
Input:  
Switcher:  
Shows the terminal name selected by the VIDEO or PC button. (Y/C, VIDEO or COMP, or PC1, PC2 or DVI)  
This display currently has no meaning. This is reserved for future use. (“CH.0” is usually displayed to  
indicate that it is not being used.)  
Source:  
Resolution:  
Shows the projected image’s type of video signal. (Video menu mode)  
Shows the resolution of the video signal being received. (PC menu mode)  
It may not be displayed correctly with some input signals.  
Shows the horizontal frequency of the video signal being received. (PC menu mode)  
Shows the vertical frequency of the video signal being received. (PC menu mode)  
Accumulated used hours of the light-source lamp.  
3
4
Remove the fuse from the fuse holder  
you just removed.  
Fuse (12 A, 250 V)  
Frequency H:  
Frequency V:  
Lamp time:  
Install the new fuse (not supplied) into  
the fuse holder.  
Fuse holder  
3
Press the MENU button to exit the menu mode.  
5
Reinstall the fuse holder into the  
projector.  
To reinstall the fuse holder, use a Phillips screwdriver.  
Fuse (12 A, 250 V)  
Fuse holder  
57  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
I Projecting after the lamp has been used for more than 1000 hours (LIGHT OUTPUT  
CONTROL MODE) (LAMP POWER CONTROL MODE)  
I Light-source lamp and lamp use time  
The light-source lamp has a service life of approximately 1000 hours.  
[Average lamp life: 1000 hours (brightness half-life)]  
When the light-source lamp approaches the end of its service life, degradation progresses rapidly. In NORMAL MODE,  
arrange for a new lamp (lamp unit) or replace the lamp after 900 hours. Depending on the usage conditions, the replacement  
time may be shorter.  
(In LOC and LPC modes, the brightness of the lamp is electrically controlled and the replacement time is extended. Arrange  
for a new lamp (lamp unit) or replace the lamp after 1900 hours. Depending on the usage conditions, the replacement time  
may be shorter.)  
Accumulated used hours  
of the light-source lamp  
When the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours:  
1000 hours  
1900 hours  
2000 hours  
2010 hours  
“1000h” and “Lamp replacement” appear on the screen.  
* The messages will disappear when any button is pressed.  
* The time after which the display appears can be set with the OSD  
menu.  
When the lamp use time exceeds 1900 hours:  
The LAMP indicator blinks on the projector.  
“Lamp replacement” appears on the screen.  
* To cancel this message, press the EXIT button or display another  
menu.  
Every time the projector is turned on, the message appears.  
When the lamp use time exceeds 2000 hours:  
The LAMP indicator blinks on the projector.  
1000  
h
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
If, even after adjusting the brightness or color, the video image is dark or the color is not correct, replace the lamp early.  
The lamp use time can be checked. Look at the “Lamp time” which is displayed with the “Information” option in the menu.  
(Refer to page 40, 42.)  
Contact the store from where you purchased the projector or the JVC service center for details about purchasing  
replacement lamps.  
Replacement lamp (lamp unit) part number: BHL 5001-SU  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
The LAMP indicator and the message on the screen warn you that replacement of the lamp is required, as follows:  
“Lamp replacement” appears on the screen and the word “Warning”  
blinks.  
I Projecting after the lamp has been used for more than 900 hours (NORMAL MODE)  
Accumulated used hours  
of the light-source lamp  
* To cancel this message, press the EXIT button.  
However, the same message will appear every hour.  
* If the projector is put in stand-by mode or turned off after the lamp has  
been used for more than 2000 hours, it can not be turned back on  
again unless the light-source lamp is replaced with a new one.  
(If the projector is not put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can be  
used until 2010 hours is reached.)  
When the lamp use time reaches 900 hours:  
900 hours  
The LAMP indicator lights on the projector.  
Warning  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
When starting to project after 900 hours has been exceeded:  
“Lamp replacement” appears on the screen.  
* The message will disappear when any button is pressed.  
When the lamp use time exceeds 1000 hours:  
The LAMP indicator blinks on the projector.  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Replace with a new lamp (lamp unit) and reset the lamp time. (Refer  
to page 62.)  
When the lamp use time reaches 2010 hours:  
The projector is forcibly turned off.  
“Lamp replacement” appears on the screen and the word “Warning”  
blinks.  
1000 hours  
* To cancel this message, press the EXIT button.  
However, the same message will appear every hour.  
* If the projector is put in stand-by mode or turned off after the lamp has  
been used for more than 1000 hours (but less than 2010 hours), it can  
not be turned back on again unless the light-source lamp is replaced  
with a new one.  
The LAMP and OPERATE indicators blinks on the projector.  
* The projector can not be turned on unless the lamp (lamp unit) is  
replaced with a new one and the lamp time is reset. (Refer to  
page 62.)  
Warning  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Replace with a new lamp (lamp unit) and reset the lamp time. (Refer  
to page 62.)  
When the lamp use time reaches 1010 hours:  
The projector is forcibly turned off.  
CAUTIONS  
• If the projector is set up in a constricted place which is unsuitable for work, and if you perform replacement work there, this  
could cause injury. Move the projector to a place large enough for work, and then replace the light-source lamp.  
• Use a genuine product for the light-source lamp. If you use other than a genuine product, this could cause a malfunction.  
Also, never use an old light-source lamp. This could cause marked degradation in performance or explode, possibly causing  
the projector to malfunction or broken pieces to injure you.  
The LAMP and OPERATE indicators blinks on the projector.  
* The projector can not be turned on unless the lamp (lamp unit) is  
replaced with a new one and the lamp time is reset. (Refer to  
page 62.)  
1010 hours  
• Do not replace the light-source lamp immediately after the projector has been used. The temperature of the light-source  
lamp is still high and could cause a burn. Allow a cooling period of one hour or more before performing replacement.  
• Before starting light-source lamp replacement work, turn off the MAIN POWER switch, and disconnect the power cord from  
the wall outlet. If you perform the replacement work with the power cord connected, this could cause injury or electric shock.  
• The light-source lamp used in this projector is a high pressure mercury lamp. Be careful when disposing of the light-source  
lamp. If anything is unclear, please consult your dealer.  
Note  
• If the projector is not put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can be used until 2010 hours is reached.  
58  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
I Be sure that the power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.  
3
Insert the new light-source lamp fully  
inside and fasten the screws.  
Fasten the two screws with a flat-end screwdriver.  
Light-source lamp  
1
Remove the lamp-replacement opening  
cover by loosening screws.  
Loosen the two screws with a flat-end screwdriver.  
CAUTION  
Screw  
• Do not touch the glass surface of the light-source lamp  
directly with your hand as well as staining it. If you touch  
with a bare hand, oils and other substances on your hand  
may adhere to the lamp, possibly preventing it from  
performing as specified and therefore giving a shortened  
lamp life, a darkened screen, etc. To handle a new light-  
source lamp, hold it by the plastic part. Never touch the  
metal part or the front glass surface.  
Note  
• The screws are fitted so that they do not come off the lamp-  
replacement opening cover.  
Handle  
Screw  
Lamp-replacement  
opening cover  
4
Replace the lamp-replacement opening  
cover and fasten the screws.  
Fasten the two screws with a flat-end screwdriver.  
Lamp-replacement  
opening cover  
Be careful not to damage  
the claw.  
CAUTIONS  
2
Loosen the screws, raise the handle,  
and pull out the light-source lamp.  
Loosen the two screws with a flat-end screwdriver.  
• Install the light-source lamp and close the lamp-  
replacement opening cover correctly; otherwise, a safety  
switch is activated to prevent the projector from operating.  
• If the claw on the lamp-replacement opening cover is  
damaged, the projector may not possibly operate. Then,  
replace with a new lamp-replacement opening cover.  
Screw  
Note  
• The screws are fitted so that they do not come off the light-  
source lamp.  
Be careful not to  
damage the claw.  
5
Reset the lamp use time.  
Perform “Resetting the Lamp Use Time” on page 62.  
Light-source lamp  
Handle  
(To be continued on the next page)  
61  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
Cleaning and Replacing the Filter Cover  
Clean the filter regularly. If the filter is heavily stained and does not clean, or if it is damaged, replace the filter with a new filter.  
Otherwise, dirt may get inside and appear on the screen, preventing you from fully enjoying the video image. If dirt gets inside  
or if you need information about the filter, consult authorized dealer where you purchased the projector or the nearest Service  
Center.  
I Resetting the Lamp Use Time  
After replacing with a new light-source lamp, reset the lamp-time counter inside the projector to clear the accumulated lamp  
time to zero (0). After resetting, a new count will start for the new light-source lamp.  
1
2
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch.  
After the projector goes into stand-by state with the STAND BY indicator on, turn off the MAIN POWER switch and pull  
out the power cord from the projector and the wall outlet.  
1
Turn on the MAIN POWER switch to go  
into stand-by mode.  
In stand-by mode, the STAND BY indicator on the  
projector lights up.  
I Projector’s button  
STAND BY  
indicator  
OPERATE  
indicator  
Remove the filter.  
Loosen the screw with a flat-end screwdriver.  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
LAMP  
TEMP  
2
Press the following buttons on the  
projector, sequentially.  
HIDE  
4
HIDE  
button  
PC  
1
PC  
1
2
3
4
Momentary press the PC button.  
Momentary press the ENTER button.  
Momentary press the EXIT button.  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
Screw  
button  
VIDEO  
MENU  
MENU  
button  
Filter  
Press and hold the HIDE button for two seconds  
or more.  
2
ENTER  
button  
3
EXIT  
button  
EXIT  
ENTER  
* During this sequence, the STAND BY and OPERATE  
indicators alternately blink about every approx. 3 seconds.  
After completion of the sequence, the STAND BY indicator  
alone stays on.  
Cursor buttons 5/∞  
* Buttons must be pressed within 2 seconds of the previous  
button.  
* When you make a mistake in button operations, return to  
the beginning of the sequence.  
Be careful not to  
damage the claws.  
* To check the lamp time on the menu, press the MENU button  
Notes  
and select “Information” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
.
The lamp use time is indicated in the item “Lamp time”.  
• The screw is fitted so that it does not come off the filter.  
• If the filter is clogged with dirt, etc., the projector goes into an warning state (the OPERATE and STAND BY indicator blink.  
etc.). Therefore regularly, clean the filter. For the warning indication, refer to page 67.  
Video main menu  
Menu  
3
Clean the filter.  
Clean the filter with a neutral detergent, wash it in water, and then dry it in the shade.  
Image adj.  
Input  
VIDEO  
CH.0  
Setting  
Switcher  
Source  
Color temp.  
Options  
NTSC  
Language  
Information  
Lamp time  
123 h  
Lamp time (0 h)  
PC main menu  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Setting  
Input  
PC 1  
CH.0  
Switcher  
CAUTIONS  
Color temp.  
Options  
Resolution 1280 1024  
• Put on rubber gloves when using neutral detergent.  
• After you have washed the filter in water, make sure the filter is completely dry before reinstalling it, otherwise an electric  
shock or malfunction could occur.  
Frequency H  
Frequency V  
Lamp time  
79.9 kHz  
75 Hz  
Language  
Information  
123  
h
Lamp time (0 h)  
• Do not clean the filter using a vacuum cleaner. Since the filter is soft, it may be sucked into the vacuum cleaner or damaged.  
4
Reinstall the filter.  
Fasten the screw with a flat-end screwdriver.  
CAUTION  
• Reset the lamp use time only when you have replaced with  
a new light-source lamp. Never reset it during lamp life,  
otherwise the replacement time may become unclear, and  
lead to degraded performance or lamp explosion.  
Notes  
• Install the filter correctly. Otherwise, the projector does not operate. (Goes into an warning state (For the warning indication,  
Refer to page 66).)  
• If the filter’s claws (in particular the claw which is hidden behind the filter cover knob) are damaged, the projector may not  
operate. Then, replace with a new filter.  
62  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
Solutions to common problems related to your projector are described here. If none of the solutions presented here solves the  
problem, unplug the projector and consult an authorized dealer or Service Center.  
Symptom  
Probable cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
A part of image is  
magnified.  
Was the DIGITAL ZOOM T button on  
the remote control pressed?  
Press the PRESET button to restore the  
original video screen.  
12, 37  
Symptom  
Power is not  
supplied.  
Probable cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
30  
Color is poor or  
unstable.  
Is picture quality (color density, etc.)  
adjusted correctly?  
Adjust picture quality on the menu.  
49  
Is the power cord disconnected?  
Insert the power cord (plug) firmly.  
Turn on the MAIN POWER switch.  
Is the MAIN POWER switch turned  
on?  
32  
Is the correct color system selected?  
Set the color system to AUTO or to the  
correct dedicated color system.  
45  
Is the fuse blown?  
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch and  
check the fuse.  
If it is blown, replace it  
57  
Are signals (scanning frequency, etc.)  
of the connected devices appropriate?  
Check if the signal is appropriate (scanning  
frequency, etc.), and input the appropriate  
signal.  
22  
Is the lamp-replacement opening cover  
closed correctly?  
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch, close  
the lamp-replacement opening cover  
correctly, and turn on the MAIN POWER  
switch again.  
7, 32, 60  
The upper part of the  
video image bows or  
distorts.  
While computer system signal is input,  
isn’t a sync signal for composite sync  
(Cs) or G on sync being input?  
Input separate sync signals for vertical sync 11, 28  
(V) and horizontal sync (H) signals.  
Isn’t signal with much jitter or skew  
distortion being input from a video  
deck?  
Input signals with little jitter or distortion.  
Use a TBC or a device with a built-in TBC.  
Is the filter closed correctly?  
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch, fit the  
filter correctly, and turn on the MAIN  
POWER switch again.  
7, 32, 63  
Video image  
suddenly go out.  
Is video picture turned off by pressing  
the HIDE button?  
Turn on video picture by pressing the HIDE 10, 12,  
Has the lamp life expired? (Has the  
lamp use time reached 1000 hours in  
the normal mode?)  
• Turn off the MAIN POWER switch, replace 32, 58,  
with a new light-source lamp, and turn on  
the MAIN POWER switch.  
button.  
35  
59, 62  
Remote control unit  
does not work.  
Are batteries installed correctly?  
Match the polarities of batteries correctly (+  
to + and – to –).  
14  
(Has the lamp use time reached 2000  
hours in the LPC or LOC mode?)  
Reset the lamp use time after replacing with  
a new lamp.  
Are batteries exhausted?  
Replace with new batteries.  
14  
20  
Is there a shielding object between the  
remote control unit and the remote  
sensor?  
Remove any shielding objects.  
Light is not emitted,  
or light level is low.  
Is the lens cap removed?  
Remove the lens cap.  
30  
Is the lamp life near its end?  
Check the lamp use time on the menu, and 56, 58,  
if the lamp life is near its end, arrange for a  
replacement lamp, or replace a little earlier.  
59  
Is the distance too long?  
Use the remote control unit at a nearer  
point.  
20  
21  
With power on,  
operation starts but  
stops in a few  
minutes.  
Is the air intake or exhaust area  
blocked?  
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch, remove 6, 7, 32  
any blocking objects, and turn on the MAIN  
POWER switch again.  
Is either side of remote cable  
disconnected?  
Firmly insert the remote cable when using  
the remote control unit as the wired one.  
* This device uses a computer. External noise may cause it to malfunction. If this happens, turn the power off, remove the  
electric plug from the wall outlet. Then insert the electric plug back into the wall outlet, turn the power back on and check the  
operation.  
Video image does not  
appear.  
Is the correct input selected?  
Select the correct input with the VIDEO and  
PC buttons.  
9, 13  
Are devices connected correctly?  
Connect devices correctly.  
11, 22  
Are signals being supplied from the  
connected devices?  
Set connected devices correctly.  
I When warning indication is shown by the blinking indicators:  
The warning status will be notified by the combination lighting of the projector’s indicators.  
For the warning contents and the action to be taken, refer to “Warning Indication” on page 66.  
Are input signals (scanning frequency,  
etc.) appropriate?  
Check if the signal is appropriate (scanning 22, 23  
frequency, etc.) and input the appropriate  
signal.  
I
Maintenance  
• Stains on the cabinet  
Is the correct color system selected?  
Is brightness adjusted correctly?  
Set the color system to AUTO or to the  
correct dedicated color system.  
45  
These should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the cabinet is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted  
neutral detergent and wring well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.  
• Since the cabinet may deteriorate in quality, become damaged, or show paint peeled, note the following:  
– Do not wipe with rough cloth.  
Adjust brightness on the menu.  
49  
Is video turned off by pressing the  
HIDE button?  
Press the HIDE button to turn video on.  
10, 12,  
35  
During DVI input, are image signals  
output from the computer graphic  
board (DVI output terminal)?  
(During DVI input, depending on the  
computer settings, there may be no  
signal input or an error may occur (blue  
screen).)  
If this happens, turn off the power to both  
the projector and the computer, and then  
turn the projector back on before turning the  
computer on again. Then correctly set the  
computer’s graphic board.  
22  
– Do not wipe vigorously.  
– Do not wipe with thinner or benzene.  
– Do not apply any volatile substance such as insecticides.  
– Do not allow any rubber or vinyl article to remain in contact with the cabinet for a long time.  
• Stains on the lens  
These should be cleaned off with commercially available lens blowers or lens cleaning paper (for cleaning glasses and  
cameras).  
Video image dims.  
Is focus adjusted correctly?  
Adjust focus.  
12, 34  
Do not use liquid cleaning agents. This could cause the surface coating to be removed.  
Do not rub, scratch or hit the lens as its surface is prone to damage.  
Is distance too short or too long?  
Set the projector at the correct distance.  
18, 76,  
77  
Are Tracking and Phase adjusted  
correctly?  
If satisfactory results are not obtained by  
pressing the QUICK ALIGN. button to  
conduct quick alignment, adjust Tracking  
and Phase on the menu.  
13, 36,  
47  
Video image is  
abnormally dark or  
bright.  
Is picture quality (Brightness, etc.)  
adjusted correctly?  
Adjust picture quality on the menu.  
49  
Video image freezes.  
Was the FREEZE button on the  
remote control pressed?  
Press the FREEZE button to release  
freezing.  
12, 37  
65  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning Indication  
If something abnormal has occurred with the projector, the warning status will be indicated by the combination of lighting the  
indicators on the control panel as shown in the following table. Then, the projector automatically stops projection and runs the  
cooling fan for about 120 seconds.  
Warning Messages  
The following shows the warning messages that can be displayed on the screen. When a warning message is displayed, take  
the corrective action described here.  
Message  
Cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
No device is connected to the  
input terminal.  
The terminal is connected but no  
signal is output from the  
connected device.  
The selected input mode (input  
terminal) name is shown in the  
first line of the massage.  
Connect a device to the selected  
terminal.  
Operate the connected device  
and output a signal.  
9, 11,  
24 ~ 29,  
33  
Warning indication table:  
Indicator  
No.  
Warning content  
LAMP  
Blink  
TEMP  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
PC  
1
*
1
2
Blink  
The light-source lamp does not light and projection  
is not made.  
No Input  
Blink  
Blink  
Blink  
The light-source lamp has suddenly gone off during  
projecting an image.  
3
4
5
6
7
Blink  
Circuit operation is abnormal.  
The frequency of the input video  
signal is out of range.  
The selected input mode (input  
terminal) name is shown in the  
first line of the message.  
Input the video signals whose  
frequency is within the projector’s  
specifications.  
22, 23,  
70  
Blink  
Blink  
Blink  
The filter is displaced.  
Blink  
Blink  
Blink  
The internal temperature is too high. (Sensor 1)  
The internal temperature is too high. (Sensor 2)  
The cooling fan has stopped (locked).  
Blink  
Blink  
PC  
1
Frequency of input signal is out of range.  
Blink  
* For individual indicator lighting, refer to page 58.  
I
Action to be taken for warning indication  
Stopping the projector:  
After the cooling fan has stopped, take the following action.  
Though the frequency of the input  
video signal is within the  
acceptable range, other items  
such as resolution are out of the  
projector’s specifications.  
The selected input mode (input  
terminal) name is shown in the  
first line of the message.  
Input the video signals that  
satisfies the projector’s  
specifications.  
22, 23,  
70  
No. 1  
No. 2  
No. 3  
:
:
:
Check that the cover for replacing the light-source lamp and the front panel are securely attached, and then, press  
the OPERATE button for one second or more to turn on the projector for retrying.  
Check that the cover for replacing the light-source lamp and the front panel are securely attached, and then, press  
the OPERATE button for one second or more to turn on the projector for retrying.  
PC  
1
Signal is not supported.  
Press the OPERATE button for one second or more to turn on the projector for retrying.  
Nos. 4-7 : Follow the next steps.  
1. Turn off the MAIN POWER switch and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
2. Take an action according to the number.  
When the FREEZE button is  
pressed, this message appears  
for a few seconds.  
When a button not acceptable is  
pressed during freezing, this  
message appears for a few  
seconds to notify that the image is  
being frozen.  
To release freezing, press the  
FREEZE button on the remote  
control.  
12, 37  
No. 4  
No. 5  
No. 6  
No. 7  
:
:
:
:
Set the filter in place.Then, leave the projector until it cools down.  
Check that nothing is blocking the air inlet nor outlet, and wait until the inside cools down.  
Check that nothing is blocking the air inlet nor outlet, and wait until the inside cools down.  
Leave the projector until it cools down.  
FREEZE  
3. Plug in the power cord again, turn on the MAIN POWER switch, and press the OPERATE button for one second or  
more to turn on the projector for retrying.  
Retrying operation:  
Plug in the power cord again and operate the projector.  
If the same warning indication is observed again, after the cooling fan has stopped, turn off the MAIN POWER switch, unplug  
the power cord, and call your dealer for repair.  
When the FREEZE button is  
pressed for the video signals that  
cannot be frozen (UXGA 60Hz,  
SXGA 60Hz.), this message  
appears for a few seconds to  
notify that the image cannot be  
frozen.  
Freeze function does not work for 12, 37  
the inputted video signals.  
To use this function, input the  
video signals that can be frozen.  
FREEZE  
*
To forcibly clear the message,  
press the EXIT button.  
66  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning Messages  
Warning Messages  
Message  
Cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
Message  
Cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to LIGHT OUTPUT  
CONTROL MODE (LOC) or LIGHT  
POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC)  
and the lamp use time display is  
turned [ON] with the OSD menu  
Arrange for a new lamp (lamp  
unit) or replace the lamp early.  
44, 46  
When the DIGITAL ZOOM button  
is pressed for the video signals  
that cannot be zoomed (UXGA  
60Hz, SXGA 60Hz.), this  
message appears for a few  
seconds to notify that the image  
cannot be digitally zoomed.  
To forcibly clear the message,  
press the EXIT button.  
Digital-zoom function does not  
work for the inputted video  
signals.  
To use the this function, input the  
video signals that can be digitally  
zoomed.  
13, 37  
1000  
h
D.ZOOM  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Displayed when the lamp use  
time exceeds 1000 hours.  
*
*
The message does not appear if  
the lamp use time display is  
turned [OFF] with the OSD menu.  
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to LIGHT OUTPUT  
CONTROL MODE (LOC) or LIGHT  
POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC)  
Arrange for a new lamp (lamp  
unit) or replace the lamp early.  
44, 46  
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to NORMAL MODE  
Arrange for a new lamp (lamp  
unit) or replace the lamp early.  
44, 46  
Appears every time the projector  
is turned on after the lamp use  
time has exceeded 900 hours and  
until it reaches 1000 hours.  
The message is cleared by  
pressing any button.  
Appears every time the projector  
is turned on after the lamp use  
time has exceeded 1900 hours  
and until it reaches 2000 hours.  
The message is cleared by  
pressing any button.  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
*
*
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to LIGHT OUTPUT  
CONTROL MODE (LOC) or LIGHT  
POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC)  
Replace with a new lamp (lamp  
unit) and reset the lamp use time.  
44, 46  
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to NORMAL MODE  
Replace with a new lamp (lamp  
unit) and reset the lamp time.  
44, 46  
When the lamp use time reaches  
1000 hours, the word “Warning”  
blinks on the screen.  
To cancel this message, press  
the EXIT button.  
However, the same message will  
appear every hour.  
If the power is turned off after the  
lamp use time has exceeded  
1000 hours, the power can not be  
turned on again.  
When the lamp use time reaches  
2000 hours, the word “Warning”  
blinks on the screen.  
Warning  
Warning  
*
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
*
To cancel this message, press  
the EXIT button.  
However, the same message will  
appear every hour.  
*
*
*
*
If the power is turned off after the  
lamp use time has exceeded  
2000 hours, the power can not be  
turned on again.  
When the lamp use time reaches  
2010 hours, the projector is  
forcibly turned off and can not be  
turned back on again.  
When the lamp use time reaches  
1010 hours, the projector is  
forcibly turned off and can not be  
turned back on again.  
Memo  
The message display language corresponds to the menu display language setting. This is set to “English (English)” when the  
projector is bought. The display language can be selected from 6 languages. (Refer to page 46.) However, the input mode  
(PC1, PC2, DVI, Y/C, VIDEO, COMP) and button indications (FREEZE, D.ZOOM, EXIT) are only displayed in English  
irrespective of the display language setting.  
The language settings in the section are explained in “English”.  
69  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DLA-G150CLU  
DLA-G150CLE  
Specifications  
I
General  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
120 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
7 A  
Allowable operation  
temperature  
41°F to 95°F (+ 5°C to + 35°C)  
Allowable relative  
humidity  
20% to 80% (no condensation)  
14°F to 140°F (– 10°C to + 60°C)  
Allowable storage  
temperature  
Approx. 20" × 10-1/2" × 15-1/2" (Approx. 505 mm × 265 mm × 393 mm)  
[Carrying band, Excluding protrusions]  
Dimensions  
(Width × Height × Depth)  
Weight  
Approx. 32.12 lbs. (Approx. 14.6 kg)  
Accessories  
(Refer to page 5.)  
* Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
* D-ILA devices are manufactured with a very high-precision technology, allowing 99.99% of the pixels to be effective. Only  
0.01% or less of the pixels are missing or always on.  
* For easy understanding, pictures and illustrations maybe emphasized, composed or have omissions and may be more or  
less different from actual products.  
* TRADEMARKS  
D-ILA is a trademark of Victor Company of Japan, Limited.  
IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Macintosh is a registered  
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
VESA is a trademark of the non-profit organization Video Electronics Standards Association.  
All other product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only, and may be the trademarks or  
registered trademarks of their respective companies.  
71  
1-37  
No.51931  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
Outside dimensions  
Pin assignment (Specifications for terminals)  
I Top  
I Y/C terminal  
Unit: inch (mm)  
20 (505)*1  
Pin number  
Signal name  
*1: Protrusion excluded  
*2: Lens excluded  
1
2
3
4
GND (Y)  
4
2
3
1
GND (C)  
E N T E R  
E X I T  
M E N U  
V I D E O  
P R E S E T  
Y
C
O
N
E
K
E
Y
S
T
P C  
H I D E  
E T  
O P E R A  
T B Y  
T E M P  
L A M P  
A
N
S
D
I RS-232C terminal  
Pin number  
Signal name  
Pin number  
Signal name  
9
8
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
N/C  
RD  
6
7
8
9
N/C  
5-1/4 (133)  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
TD  
I Front  
I Side  
N/C  
GND  
5
4
3
2
1
15-1/2 393)*2  
(
20 (505)*1  
I PC1 terminal/PC OUT terminal  
Pin number  
Signal name  
Red  
Pin number  
Signal name  
N/C  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 12 13 14 15  
Green10  
Blue  
GND  
(SYNC)  
GND  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
2-7/8  
70)  
N/C  
N/C  
2-1/8  
52)  
15-1/2  
(392)  
10-1/8  
(256)  
(
(
N/C  
H.SYNC  
V.SYNC  
N/C  
6
7
1
2
8 3  
4
5
9 10  
GND (Red)  
GND (Green)  
GND (Blue)  
I DVI terminal  
Pin  
number  
Pin  
number  
Pin  
number  
Signal name  
Signal name  
T.M.D.S.Data1-  
Signal name  
1
2
3
T.M.D.S.Data2-  
9
17  
T.M.D.S.Data0-  
T.M.D.S.Data0+  
9
11 13 15  
10 12 14 16  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
T.M.D.S.Data2+ 10  
T.M.D.S.Data1+ 18  
T.M.D.S.Data2  
Shield  
11  
T.M.D.S.Data1  
Shield  
19  
T.M.D.S.Data0  
Shield  
4
5
6
No Connect  
No Connect  
DDC Clock  
12  
13  
14  
No Connect  
No Connect  
+5V Power  
20  
21  
22  
No Connect  
No Connect  
17 19 21 23  
18 20 22 24  
T.M.D.S. Clock  
Shield  
7
8
DDC Data  
15  
16  
Ground (for +5 V) 23  
Hot Plug Detect 24  
T.M.D.S. Clock +  
T.M.D.S. Clock -  
No Connect  
72  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C external control  
RS-232C external control  
By connecting a computer to the RS-232C terminal, you can control the projector. Use a reverse connection cable as the RS-  
232C connection cable.  
The commands to control the projector and the response data against the received commands are explained here.  
For further information, please consult the dealer where you purchased your projector or consult the Service Center.  
2-3 Parameters used for the data format  
The following three kinds of parameters are prepared for the control command and response data.  
(1) Numeric value  
Designates the 2-byte hexadecimal value with the sign as the 4-digit (byte) characters.  
Designation allowable range: “8000” to “7FFF”  
1. Communication Specifications  
The communication specifications are as follows:  
(2) ON/OFF  
Baud rate  
Data length  
Parity  
9600bps / 19200bps*  
Designates the status (ON/OFF) of the projector, such as POWER and HIDE.  
8 bits  
None  
1 bit  
Character  
Hex.  
30  
Meaning  
OFF  
“0”  
“1”  
Stop bit  
31  
ON  
Flow control  
None  
* Factory set value. To change the value, refer to “Setting and Adjusting Other Functions (OPTIONS)” on page 54.  
(3) Special parameters  
Input switching parameters:  
2. Command Format  
2-1. Command data format (from the computer to the projector)  
Character  
Hex.  
30  
Meaning  
Y/C  
“0”  
“1”  
“2”  
“3”  
“4”  
“5”  
When sending a control command, use the following data format.  
31  
VIDEO  
COMP  
PC1  
Header  
ID  
SP  
Command  
SP  
Parameter  
CR  
32  
Header: Designates the head of data and the kind of data.  
“!” (21h): Control command to the projector  
33  
34  
PC2  
“?” (3Fh): Query to the projector (Asking command)  
“1” (fixed)  
ID:  
35  
DVI  
SP:  
CR:  
Designates the delimiter for ID, Command, and Parameter. (20h)  
Designates the terminal of the data. (0Dh)  
Operation mode parameters:  
* [ ] is not necessary when Asking command.  
Character  
“0000”  
Hex.  
Meaning  
30h, 30h, 30h, 30h  
30h, 30h, 30h, 31h  
30h, 30h, 30h, 32h  
30h, 30h, 30h, 34h  
Stand-by mode  
Power-on mode  
Cool-down mode  
Warning mode  
2-2. Response data format (from the projector to the computer)  
Upon executing the received control command, the projector sends back the following response data to the computer.  
Header ID SP Normal Termination Status SP Parameter CR  
Header: Designates the head of data.  
“0001”  
“0002”  
“0004”  
“@” (40h): Fetches data from the projector.  
“1” (fixed)  
Designates the delimiter for ID, Command, and Parameter (20h)  
ID:  
SP:  
3. Control command table  
Normal Termination Status: “0” (30h)  
The control commands that can be sent from the computer are as follows:  
CR:  
Designates the terminal of the data (0Dh)  
Asking  
Kind of data  
ON/OFF  
Function  
OPERATE  
Command  
Power ON  
ELSE  
Numeric Value  
Special Data  
U0F  
U00  
U17  
U18  
U40  
U1A  
I
I
I
I
HIDE  
I
I
I
I
Right Left rev.  
Top Bottom inv.  
Keystone  
Input  
I
Y/C, VIDEO, PC1, PC2,  
COMP, DVI  
I
I
Operation mode  
Z03  
Stand-by, Power-on,  
Cool-down, Warning  
I
* Keystone: Numeric value can range from “FF80” to “0080”  
* Operation mode: Only Asking command is possible  
75  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Appendix  
For lens unit GL-M2920ZG (2 to 3:1):  
I Relationship between Projection Distances and Projection Screen Sizes  
Approximate projection distance unit: ft (m)  
For 4:3 aspect-ratio screens For 16:9 aspect-ration screens  
Notes  
Projection screen size  
(Diagonal length)  
• The relationship between the projection distances and projection screen sizes differs depending on the lens unit (optional)  
you are using.  
• The projection distance and projection screen sizes listed here are only for a guide. Use them as reference when setting the  
projector.  
Wide end  
Tele end  
Wide end  
Tele end  
40" (approx. 101.6 cm)  
42" (approx. 106.7 cm)  
50" (approx. 127.0 cm)  
60" (approx. 152.4 cm)  
70" (approx. 177.8 cm)  
80" (approx. 203.2 cm)  
100" (approx. 254.0 cm)  
150" (approx. 381.0 cm)  
200" (approx. 508.0 cm)  
240" (approx. 609.6 cm)  
250" (approx. 635.0 cm)  
300" (approx. 762.0 cm)  
310" (approx. 787.4 cm)  
320" (approx. 812.8 cm)  
330" (approx. 838.2 cm)  
340" (approx. 863.6 cm)  
350" (approx. 889.0 cm)  
400" (approx. 1016.0 cm)  
450" (approx. 1143.0 cm)  
470" (approx. 1193.8 cm)  
480" (approx. 1219.2 cm)  
500" (approx. 1270.0 cm)  
521" (approx. 1323.3 cm)  
---------  
---------  
8.23 (2.51)  
9.74 (2.97)  
11.65 (3.55)  
13.55 (4.13)  
15.42 (4.70)  
19.23 (5.86)  
28.71 (8.75)  
38.16 (11.63)  
45.73 (13.94)  
47.64 (14.52)  
57.09 (17.40)  
58.99 (17.98)  
60.89 (18.56)  
62.76 (19.13)  
64.67 (19.71)  
---------  
---------  
8.53 (2.60)  
9.96 (2.73)  
10.60 (3.23)  
12.66 (3.86)  
14.73 (4.49)  
16.80 (5.12)  
20.90 (6.37)  
31.23 (9.52)  
41.54 (12.66)  
49.80 (15.18)  
51.87 (15.81)  
62.17 (18.95)  
64.24 (19.58)  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
For lens unit GL-M2910G (1:1):  
---------  
8.50 (2.59)  
9.84 (3.00)  
11.22 (3.42)  
13.94 (4.25)  
20.77 (6.33)  
27.59 (8.41)  
33.04 (10.07)  
34.38 (10.48)  
41.21 (12.56)  
42.59 (12.98)  
43.93 (13.39)  
45.31 (13.81)  
46.65 (14.22)  
48.03 (14.64)  
54.86 (16.72)  
61.65 (18.79)  
64.37 (19.62)  
---------  
Approximate projection distance unit: ft (m)  
Projection screen size  
9.09 (2.77)  
10.33 (3.15)  
12.83 (3.91)  
19.09 (5.82)  
25.33 (7.72)  
30.35 (9.25)  
31.59 (9.63)  
37.86 (11.54)  
39.11 (11.92)  
40.35 (12.30)  
41.60 (12.68)  
42.85 (13.06)  
44.09 (13.44)  
50.36 (15.35)  
56.63 (17.26)  
59.12 (18.02)  
60.37 (18.40)  
62.89 (19.17)  
65.52 (19.97)  
(Diagonal length)  
For 4:3 aspect-ratio screens  
For 16:9 aspect-ration screens  
36.7" (approx. 93.2 cm)  
40" (approx. 101.6 cm)  
50" (approx. 127.0 cm)  
60" (approx. 152.4 cm)  
70" (approx. 177.8 cm)  
80" (approx. 203.2 cm)  
90" (approx. 228.6 cm)  
100" (approx. 254.0 cm)  
110" (approx. 279.4 cm)  
120" (approx. 304.8 cm)  
130" (approx. 330.2 cm)  
140" (approx. 355.6 cm)  
150" (approx. 381.0 cm)  
160" (approx. 406.4 cm)  
170" (approx. 431.8 cm)  
180" (approx. 457.2 cm)  
190" (approx. 482.6 cm)  
200" (approx. 508.0 cm)  
---  
2.53 (0.77)  
2.76 (0.84)  
3.48 (1.06)  
4.20 (1.28)  
4.95 (1.51)  
5.68 (1.73)  
6.40 (1.95)  
7.12 (2.17)  
7.87 (2.40)  
8.60 (2.62)  
9.32 (2.84)  
10.04 (3.06)  
10.79 (3.29)  
11.52 (3.51)  
12.24 (3.73)  
12.96 (3.95)  
13.68 (4.17)  
---  
2.53 (0.77)  
3.18 (0.97)  
3.84 (1.17)  
4.53 (1.38)  
5.18 (1.58)  
5.87 (1.79)  
6.53 (1.99)  
7.22 (2.20)  
7.87 (2.40)  
8.53 (2.60)  
9.22 (2.81)  
9.88 (3.01)  
10.56 (3.22)  
11.22 (3.42)  
11.88 (3.62)  
12.57 (3.83)  
13.22 (4.03)  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
For lens unit GL-M2930SZG (2.9 to 5.5:1):  
Projection screen size  
For lens unit GL-M2915SG (1.5:1):  
Approximate projection distance unit: ft(m)  
For 4:3 aspect-ratio screens For 16:9 aspect-ration screens  
Approximate projection distance unit: ft (m)  
Projection screen size  
(Diagonal length)  
(Diagonal length)  
For 4:3 aspect-ratio screens  
For 16:9 aspect-ration screens  
Wide end  
Tele end  
Wide end  
Tele end  
55" (approx. 139.7 cm)  
60" (approx. 152.4 cm)  
65" (approx. 165.1 cm)  
70" (approx. 177.8 cm)  
75" (approx. 190.5 cm)  
80" (approx. 203.2 cm)  
85" (approx. 215.9 cm)  
90" (approx. 228.6 cm)  
95" (approx. 241.3 cm)  
100" (approx. 254.0 cm)  
105" (approx. 266.7 cm)  
110" (approx. 279.4 cm)  
115" (approx. 292.1 cm)  
120" (approx. 304.8 cm)  
125" (approx. 317.5 cm)  
130" (approx. 330.2 cm)  
135" (approx. 342.9 cm)  
140" (approx. 355.6 cm)  
145" (approx. 368.3 cm)  
150" (approx. 381.0 cm)  
---  
6.00 (1.83)  
6.30 (1.92)  
6.82 (2.08)  
7.38 (2.25)  
7.91 (2.41)  
8.46 (2.58)  
9.02 (2.75)  
9.55 (2.91)  
10.10 (3.08)  
10.63 (3.24)  
11.19 (3.41)  
11.75 (3.58)  
12.27 (3.74)  
12.83 (3.91)  
13.35 (4.07)  
13.91 (4.24)  
14.44 (4.40)  
---  
40" (approx. 101.6 cm)  
50" (approx. 127.0 cm)  
60" (approx. 152.4 cm)  
70" (approx. 177.8 cm)  
80" (approx. 203.2 cm)  
100" (approx. 254.0 cm)  
150" (approx. 381.0 cm)  
200" (approx. 508.0 cm)  
240" (approx. 609.6 cm)  
250" (approx. 635.0 cm)  
260" (approx. 660.4 cm)  
270" (approx. 685.8 cm)  
280" (approx. 711.2 cm)  
300" (approx. 762.0 cm)  
350" (approx. 889.0 cm)  
400" (approx. 1016.0 cm)  
470" (approx. 1193.8 cm)  
480" (approx. 1219.2 cm)  
500" (approx. 1270.0 cm)  
510" (approx. 1295.4 cm)  
---------  
14.83 (4.52)  
18.44 (5.62)  
22.05 (6.72)  
25.66 (7.82)  
29.30 (8.93)  
36.52 (11.13)  
54.59 (16.64)  
72.67 (22.15)  
87.14 (26.56)  
90.78 (27.67)  
94.39 (28.77)  
97.99 (29.87)  
---------  
---------  
16.11 (4.91)  
20.05 (6.11)  
23.98 (7.31)  
27.92 (8.51)  
31.86 (9.71)  
39.76 (12.12)  
59.45 (18.12)  
79.17 (24.13)  
94.91 (28.93)  
---------  
5.77 (1.76)  
6.27 (1.91)  
6.76 (2.06)  
7.28 (2.22)  
7.78 (2.37)  
8.27 (2.52)  
8.76 (2.67)  
9.28 (2.83)  
9.78 (2.98)  
10.27 (3.13)  
10.76 (3.28)  
11.25 (3.43)  
11.78 (3.59)  
12.27 (3.74)  
12.76 (3.89)  
13.25 (4.04)  
13.75 (4.19)  
14.27 (4.35)  
14.76 (4.50)  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
14.83 (4.52)  
16.93 (5.16)  
21.06 (6.42)  
31.43 (9.58)  
41.77 (12.73)  
50.07 (15.26)  
52.13 (15.89)  
54.20 (16.52)  
56.27 (17.15)  
58.33 (17.78)  
62.50 (19.05)  
72.83 (22.20)  
83.20 (25.36)  
97.70 (29.78)  
---------  
15.55 (4.74)  
19.36 (5.90)  
28.87 (8.80)  
38.39 (11.70)  
45.96 (14.01)  
47.86 (14.59)  
49.77 (15.17)  
51.67 (15.75)  
53.58 (16.33)  
57.38 (17.49)  
66.90 (20.39)  
76.41 (23.29)  
89.70 (27.34)  
91.60 (27.92)  
95.41 (29.08)  
97.31 (29.66)  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---  
---------  
---------  
---------  
76  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DLA-G150CLU  
DLA-G150CLE  
PROJECTOR  
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG :  
PROJEKTOR  
MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS : PROJECTEUR  
MANUALE D’ISTRUZIONI : PROIETTORE  
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES : PROYECTOR  
INSTRUCTIONS  
DLA-G150CLE  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
W
SCREEN FREEZE  
S
PC1  
PC2  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
T
T
ZOOM  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
W
W
PRESET  
EXIT  
ENTER  
RM-M150 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
(Lenses are optional)  
LCT1124-001A  
1-41  
No.51931  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This product should be operated only with the type of  
power source indicated on the label. If you are not sure  
of the type of power supply to your home, consult your  
product dealer or local power company.  
When connecting other products such as VCR’s, and  
personal computers, you should turn off the power of this  
product for protection against electric shock.  
Thank you for purchasing this projector. Before using it, read and follow all instructions carefully to take full  
advantage of the projector’s capabilities.  
Do not place combustibles behind the cooling fan. For  
example, cloth, paper, matches, aerosol cans or gas  
lighters that present special hazards when over heated.  
This product is equipped with a three-wire plug. This  
plug will fit only into a grounded power outlet. If you are  
unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your  
electrician to install the proper outlet. Do not defeat the  
safety purpose of the grounded plug.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
Do not look into the projection lens while the illumination  
lamp is turned on. Exposure of your eyes to the strong  
light can result in impaired eyesight.  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS  
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not  
likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or  
against them. Pay particular attention to cords at doors,  
plugs, receptacles, and the point where they exit from the  
product.  
Do not look into the inside of this unit through vents  
(ventilation holes), etc. Do not look at the illumination  
lamp directly by opening the cabinet while the  
illumination lamp is turned on. The illumination lamp also  
contains ultraviolet rays and the light is so powerful that  
your eyesight can be impaired.  
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This  
unit has been engineered and manufactured to assure your  
personal safety. But IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN  
POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD. In  
order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated into this  
product, observe the following basic rules for its installation,  
use and service. Please read these “Important Safeguards”  
carefully before use.  
WARNING :  
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARDS, DO  
NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR  
MOISTURE.  
For added protection of this product during a lightning  
storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long  
periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and  
disconnect the cable system. This will prevent damage  
to the product due to lightning and power line surges.  
Do not drop, hit, or damage the light-source lamp (lamp  
unit) in any way. It may cause the light-source lamp to  
break and lead to injuries. Do not use a damaged light-  
source lamp. If the light-source lamp is broken, ask your  
dealer to repair it. Fragments from a broken light-source  
lamp may cause injures.  
All the safety and operating instructions should be read  
before the product is operated.  
WARNING :  
Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or  
convenience receptacles on other equipment as this can  
result in a risk of fire or electric shock.  
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.  
The safety and operating instructions should be retained  
for future reference.  
Xenon gas is enclosed with high pressure inside the light-  
source lamp (lamp unit) of this projector. If you drop or  
impart a shock to the lamp, or discard it as is, there is the  
possibility of explosion, leading to personal injury. Use  
special care when handling the lamp. For any unclear  
points, consult your product dealer.  
Never push objects of any kind into this product through  
openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or  
short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.  
Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
All warnings on the product and in the operating  
instructions should be adhered to.  
CAUTION :  
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove cover.  
Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.  
All operating instructions should be followed.  
Place the projector near a wall outlet where the plug can  
be easily unplugged.  
Do not attempt to service this product yourself as  
opening or removing covers may expose you to  
dangerous voltages and other hazards. Refer all service  
to qualified service personnel.  
Do not “ceiling-mount” the projector to a place which  
tends to vibrate; otherwise, the attaching fixture of the  
projector could be broken by the vibration, possibly  
causing it to fall or overturn, which could lead to personal  
injury.  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning.  
Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a  
damp cloth for cleaning.  
MACHINE NOISE INFORMATION  
(Germany only)  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer service  
to qualified service personnel under the following  
conditions:  
Changes Machine Noise Information Ordinance 3.  
GSGV, January 18, 1991: The sound pressure  
level at the operator position is equal or less than  
70 dB(A) according to ISO 7779.  
Do not use attachments not recommended by the  
product manufacturer as they may be hazardous.  
Use only the accessory cord designed for this product to  
prevent shock.  
Do not use this product near water. Do not use  
immediately after moving from a low temperature to high  
temperature, as this causes condensation, which may  
result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.  
a) When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.  
The power supply voltage rating of this product is  
AC 200 V - AC 240 V, the power cord attached conforms  
to the following power supply voltage. Use only the  
power cord designated by our dealer to ensure Safety  
and EMC.  
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen on the  
product.  
About burning-in of the D-ILA device  
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
Do not place this product on an unstable  
cart, stand, or table. The product may  
fall, causing serious injury to a child or  
adult, and serious damage to the  
product. The product should be mounted  
according to the manufacturer’s  
Do not allow the same still picture to be projected for a long  
time or an abnormally bright video picture to be projected.  
Do not project video images with high-intensity or high-  
contrast on a screen. The video image could be burned in to  
the D-ILA device.  
d) If the product does not operate normally by following  
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls  
that are covered by the Operation Manual, as an  
improper adjustment of controls may result in damage  
and will often require extensive work by a qualified  
technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
When it is used by other power supply voltage, power  
cable must be changed.  
Ensure that the power cable used for the projector is the  
correct type for the AC outlet in your country.  
Use special care when projecting video games or computer  
program images. There is no problem with ordinary  
video-cassette playback images.  
instructions, and should use a mount recommended by  
the manufacturer.  
Consult your product dealer.  
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any  
way.  
About the installation place  
When the product is used on a cart, care should be taken  
to avoid quick stops, excessive force, and uneven  
surfaces which may cause the product and cart to  
overturn, damaging equipment or causing possible injury  
to the operator.  
Power cord  
Do not install the projector in a place that cannot support its  
weight securely.  
f ) When the product exhibits a distinct change in  
performance – this indicates a need for service.  
If the installation place is not sturdy enough, the projector  
could fall or overturn, possibly causing personal injury.  
When replacement parts are required, be sure the  
service technician has used replacement parts specified  
by the manufacturer or with same characteristics as the  
original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in  
fire, electric shock, or other hazards.  
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for  
ventilation. These ensure reliable operation of the  
product and protect it from overheating. These openings  
must not be blocked or covered. (The openings should  
never be blocked by placing the product on bed, sofa,  
rug, or similar surface. It should not be placed in a built-in  
installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper  
ventilation is provided and the manufacturer’s  
For European  
continent countries  
For United Kingdom  
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product,  
ask the service technician to perform safety checks to  
determine that the product is in proper operating  
condition.  
*DO NOT allow any unqualified person to  
install the unit.  
Be sure to ask your dealer to install the unit (eg.  
attaching it to the ceilling) since special technical  
knowledge and skills are required for installation.  
If installation is performed by an unqualified person, it  
may cause personal injury or electrical shock.  
The product should be placed more than one foot away  
from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers,  
stoves, and other products (including amplifiers) that  
produce heat.  
instructions have been adhered to.)  
For proper ventilation, separate the product from other  
equipment, which may prevent ventilation and keep /  
distance more than 60 cm.  
1
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
POWER CONNECTION  
(United Kingdom only)  
Contents  
Setting for Watching Image Software  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................. 1  
Contents........................................... 4  
Accessories ..................................... 5  
Controls and Features .................... 6  
Front Side / Top Surface / Right Side .....................6  
Left-hand Side / Rear Side......................................7  
Bottom Surface .......................................................8  
Control Panel on the Projector................................9  
Connector Panel ...................................................11  
Remote Control Unit..............................................12  
Installing Batteries.................................................14  
Precautions for using batteries..............................14  
WARNING  
(Video Menu Mode Only) ..................................... 48  
Adjusting Picture Quality ...................................... 49  
Adjusting Color temperature................................. 50  
Adjusting the Video Screen/Menu Position .......... 51  
Changing the Image Gamma/Aspect Ratio  
(Video Menu Mode Only) ..................................... 52  
Changing the Image Size - Resize Function  
(PC Menu Mode Only).......................................... 53  
Changing the Clamp pulse position  
(PC Menu Mode Only).......................................... 53  
Setting and Adjusting Other Functions  
(OPTIONS)........................................................... 54  
Getting Information............................................... 56  
The wire which is coloured green-and-yellow must be  
Do not cut off the main plug from this equipment.  
If the plug fitted is not suitable for the power points in your  
home or the cable is too short to reach a power point, then  
obtain an appropriate safety approved extension lead or  
adapter or consult your dealer.  
connected to the terminal which is marked  
with the letter  
E or the safety earth or coloured green or green-and-yellow.  
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to the  
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black.  
If nonetheless the mains plug is cut off, remove the fuse and  
dispose of the plug immediately, to avoid a possible shock  
hazard by inadvertent connection to the main supply.  
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to the  
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red.  
If a new main plug has to be fitted, then follow the instruction  
given below:  
When replacing the fuse, be sure to use only a correctly  
rated approved type, re-fit the fuse cover.  
IF IN DOUBT —— CONSULT A COMPETENT  
ELECTRICIAN.  
WARNING:  
Installing the Projector.................. 15  
Precautions for Installation....................................15  
Adjusting the Inclination of the Projector...............16  
Installing the Projector against the Screen............17  
Projection Distance and Screen Size....................18  
Setting the Amount of Lens Shifting......................19  
Effective Range and Distance of the  
Remote Control Unit..............................................20  
Setting the Position Selecting Screw for Ceiling  
Mounting ...............................................................21  
When installing (adjusting/setting) the unit............21  
Replacing the Fuse........................57  
Replacing the Light-Source  
Lamp ...............................................58  
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.  
How To Replace The Fuse  
Open the fuse compartment with the blade screwdriver, and  
replace the fuse.  
IMPORTANT:  
Cleaning and Replacing the  
(* An example is shown in the illustration below.)  
The wires in the mains lead on this product are coloured in  
accordance with the following cord:  
Green-and-yellow: Earth  
Filter Cover.....................................63  
Troubleshooting.............................64  
Warning Indication.........................66  
Warning Messages ........................67  
Specifications.................................70  
Outside dimensions.............................................. 72  
Pin assignment (Specifications for terminals) ...... 73  
Blue:  
Brown:  
Neutral  
Live  
As these colours may not correspond with the coloured  
making identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as  
follows:  
Fuse  
Connecting to Various Devices.... 22  
Signals that Can Be Input to the Projector............22  
Connecting to Video Devices................................24  
Connecting to Hi-Vision Devices/DVD Players .....25  
Connecting to Other Devices ................................26  
Connecting to Devices which Control the  
Projector................................................................27  
Connecting to Computer Devices .........................28  
Connecting to DVI.................................................29  
How to attach the ferrite core................................29  
Connecting the Power Cord..................................30  
Removing the Lens Cap........................................30  
RS-232C external control ..............74  
Appendix.........................................76  
Basic Operations........................... 31  
1. Turning on the Power........................................32  
2. Select the Input source to be Projected ............33  
3. Adjust the Screen Size (Zooming) ....................34  
4. Adjust Focus .....................................................34  
5. Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio .......................34  
Turning off Image (HIDE)......................................35  
Removing the Trapezoidal Distortion of the  
Image ....................................................................35  
Quick Alignment Function (QUICK ALIGN.)..........36  
Displaying a Still Picture (FREEZE)......................37  
Zooming a Part of the Image  
(DIGITAL ZOOM T/W) ..........................................37  
Menu Operations ........................... 38  
Basic Menu Operation...........................................43  
Changing the Color System  
(Video Menu Mode Only) ......................................45  
Changing the Language Display...........................46  
Changing the Screen aspect ratio/HDTV format  
(Video Menu Mode Only) ......................................46  
Adjusting Tracking/Phase .....................................47  
4
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DLA-G150CLE  
Accessories  
Controls and Features  
The following accessories are included with this projector. Check for them; if any item is missing, please  
Front Side / Top Surface / Right Side  
contact your dealer.  
I Remote control unit (RM-M160G)  
I Personal computer connection cable  
[approx. 2 m]  
R
E
T
N
E
U
N
O
E
E
M
D
I
V
C
P
T
I
E X  
E
T
A
R
E
P
O
T
E
S E P R  
E
E
D
I
O N  
T
Y E S  
P
M
H
K
E
T
P
A M  
L
N
W
O
D
(D-sub, 3-row 15 pin)  
P
U
1
9
8
7
I Video cable  
[approx. 2 m]  
I AA/R6-size dry cell battery (×2)  
(for checking operation)  
6
5 4 3  
2
1
Exhaust vents  
Vents for cooling fans through which warm air comes out.  
6
7
Adjustable feet (for adjusting the height and  
angle)  
By extending the feet, the projector angle can be  
adjusted up to +7°.  
For details, refer to “Adjusting the Inclination of the  
Projector” on page 16.  
CAUTION  
• Do not block the exhaust vents, or heat will build up inside,  
possibly causing a fire. Also, do not touch the vents, or this  
could give you a low-temperature burn.  
Lens  
I Conversion adapter for Mac  
(for Macintosh)  
I Power cord  
[approx. 2.5 m]  
One of the optional lens units should be installed before  
using the projector.  
A lens-hole blind cover (black one) is installed when the  
projector is shipped from the factory.  
For details on the types of optional lenses available, refer  
to page 18.  
2
Carrying handle  
Raise this handle when carrying the projector.  
(for European continental countries)  
CAUTIONS  
• When carrying the projector, do not transmit shocks to it.  
Also be careful to keep it balanced.  
• Do not carry it while the light-source lamp is on or the  
CAUTION  
cooling fan is operating. This could cause personal injury.  
• Please consult your authorized dealer or service center for  
information about attaching an optional lens.  
3
4
AC IN (power input) terminal  
This is the power input terminal where the supplied  
power cord is connected. For details, refer to page 30.  
8
Lens cap  
(for United Kingdom)  
I BNC-RCA Conversion plug  
This is the lens cap provided for the optional lens.  
When you are not using the projector, attach the lens cap  
to protect the lens from dirt or being damaged. (Refer to  
page 30.)  
Fuse holder  
A fuse rated T6.3A H 250 V is installed. (Power source  
protection)  
To replace the fuse, refer to page 57.  
9
Remote sensor  
When operating with the remote control, aim it toward  
this sensor. (Refer to page 20.)  
CAUTION  
• When replacing the fuse, use the same rating and type.  
Otherwise, a fire may occur and/or the projector may be  
damaged.  
5
MAIN POWER switch  
I Hex. wrench  
I Ferrite core (×2)  
This is the main power switch. When it is turned on, the  
projector goes into stand-by state, and the STAND BY  
indicator on the control panel comes on. (Refer to  
page 32.)  
ON [ | ]: The main power turns on.  
OFF []: The main power turns off.  
                                                                                                                                                                  
5
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and Features  
Controls and Features  
Bottom Surface  
Left-hand Side / Rear Side  
t
y
u
i
t
Air inlet (filter)  
Air is taken in through the filter to cool the light-source  
lamp. If the filter is blocked or if something that obstructs  
the flow of air is placed around the projector, heat may  
build up inside and could cause a fire. For required  
space, refer to “Precautions for Installation” on page 15.  
p
q
Connector panel  
For details, refer to “Connector Panel” on page 11.  
Rear adjustable foot (for leveling the projector)  
It is set at the shortest position when shipped from the  
factory. Turn the foot to make the projector level.  
Adjustment can be made in the range of +1.5° and –1.5°  
from the horizontal position. For details, refer to  
CAUTIONS  
• Be careful as paper, cloth or soft cushion could be drawn in  
if placed nearby. Do not block the filter, or heat may build  
up and could cause a fire.  
• Clean the filter periodically. For details, refer to “Cleaning  
and Replacing the Filter Cover” on page 63. Deposition of  
dirt on the filter reduces the cooling effect, causing heat to  
build up inside, which could cause a fire or malfunction.  
“Adjusting the Inclination of the Projector” on page 16.  
w
e
Air inlet  
This is the air inlet. Do not cover or obstruct this slot.  
Control panel  
For details, refer to “Control Panel on the Projector” on  
page 9.  
y
Opening for replacing the light-source lamp  
For replacing the light-source lamp, refer to “Replacing  
the Light-Source Lamp” on page 58.  
r
Lens shift knob cap  
When you have mounted a lens that uses the lens shift  
function, open this cap and rotate the lens shift knob to  
move the lens position. For more information, refer to  
“Setting the Amount of Lens Shifting” on page 19.  
u
i
Fixing foot  
Position selecting screw for ceiling mounting  
When using the projector in an upside-down, ceiling-  
mounted position (inverted top-to-bottom and right-to-  
left), the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting”  
must be turned to switch to ceiling mounting.  
This will correct variance in color images (shading),  
which otherwise would occur in ceiling mounting.  
For more information, refer to “Setting the Position  
Selecting Screw for Ceiling Mounting” on page 21.  
CAUTION  
• To ceiling-mount and adjust the projector, special expertise  
and technique are necessary. Be sure to ask your dealer or  
specialist to perform this work.  
8
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DLA-G150CLE  
Controls and Features  
Controls and Features  
9
EXIT button  
Control Panel on the Projector  
This button will be used in the menu mode to return to the  
previous menu. When the main menu is displayed, this  
button will cause the menu to disappear. For details, refer  
to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
r
e
1
p
PRESET button  
This PRESET button only works as a reset button for the  
direct button adjustment of the KEYSTONE button of the  
control panel and the DIGITAL ZOOM button of the  
remote control. When adjusting the keystone or digital  
zoom (when the setting is displayed on the screen) the  
adjusted value is reset to that which was set when the  
projector was shipped from the factory. Of the menu  
items, this button only works for the keystone setting  
screen.  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
LAMP  
TEMP  
2
3
HIDE  
w
q
PC  
4
5
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
VIDEO  
MENU  
6
7
p
q
w
KEYSTONE  
/
buttons  
9
8
EXIT  
ENTER  
Use these buttons to correct a trapezoidal distortion of  
the projected image. (Refer to page 35.)  
HIDE button  
Use this button to turn off the image on the screen  
temporarily. Pressing it again restores the image to  
resume. (Refer to page 35.)  
1
STAND BY Indicator  
Memo  
ON :  
When in stand-by mode.  
While in the cool-down mode (STAND BY indicator is blinking):  
Even if you press the OPERATE button, the projector is not  
turned on. Wait until the projector enters stand-by mode  
(STAND BY indicator stays lit).  
Blinking :When in cool-down mode.  
e
LAMP indicator  
Memo  
ON :  
After the light-source lamp has been used for  
more than approx. 900 hours. (NORMAL only)  
About the cool-down mode:  
Blinking : After the light-source lamp has been used for  
more than approx. 1000 hours (1900 hours in the  
LPC or LOC mode). Replace the light-source  
lamp. Refer to “Replacing the Light-Source  
Lamp” on page 58 or page 59.  
4
PC button  
This projector has a function to cool down the heated lamp for a  
fixed period of time (approx. 120 seconds) after projection is  
finished. This feature is referred to as the cool-down mode.  
The purpose of the cool-down mode is to prevent inner parts  
from being deformed or broken by heat from the heated lamp  
as well as to prolong the life of the lamp.  
Use this button to select a device connected to the PC 1,  
PC 2 or DVI terminals. Each time you press the button,  
the selection alternates among PC 1, PC 2 and DVI.  
* “PC1” , “PC2” or “DVI” will be displayed on the top right of  
the projected image. (This function can be disabled by  
the menu.)  
r
TEMP indicator  
Blinking : The temperature inside the projector has risen  
CAUTIONS  
5
VIDEO button  
abnormally.  
Use this button to select a device such as a video deck  
connected to the AV IN (Y/C, VIDEO or COMP) terminal  
of the projector. Each time you press the button, the  
selection alternates among Y/C, VIDEO and COMP.  
* “Y/C”, “VIDEO” or “COMP” will be displayed on the top right of  
the projected image. (This function can be disabled by the  
menu.)  
• Do not turn off the MAIN POWER switch while in the cool-  
down mode.  
• Do not place the projector on its side or stand it upright  
Note  
• While the TEMP indicator is blinking (during abnormal  
temperature), the power is automatically cut off.  
while in the cool-down mode; this may block the vents.  
2
3
OPERATE indicator  
ON : When the projector is in operation (projecting).  
OFF : When the projector is not in operation (not  
projecting).  
6
7
MENU button  
Use this button to enter or exit the menu mode. The main  
menu appears or disappears at the screen. For details,  
refer to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
OPERATE button  
When the projector is in the stand-by mode, press this  
button one second or more, and the projector is turned  
on, causing the OPERATE indicator to light.  
Press it one second or more again, and the projector  
goes into the cool-down mode, then stand-by mode.  
(Refer to page 32.)  
* You cannot use the OPERATE button for about one  
minute after the lamp blinks. Press the button after a  
minute or longer has elapsed.  
ENTER button  
This button will be used in the menu mode. Use to  
display the hierarchical menus. Also use when “ENTER”  
is displayed against the item on the menu screen or  
when the “All reset” selection is confirmed. For details,  
refer to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
8
Cursor buttons 5  
/
/
2/  
3
These buttons will be used in the menu mode to select an  
item, or to set or adjust the value. For details, refer to  
“Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
9
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and Features  
Controls and Features  
Remote Control Unit  
Connector Panel  
On the remote control, the same buttons as on the control  
panel of the projector are provided except for the following  
buttons. For the same buttons, operation is the same in  
principle.  
5
VIDEO button  
Use this button to select a device such as a video deck  
connected to the AV IN terminal (VIDEO, Y/C or COMP  
input terminal) of the projector. Each time you press the  
button, the selection alternates among Y/C, VIDEO and  
DVI. (Refer to page 33.)  
* “Y/C”, “VIDEO” or “DVI” will be displayed on the top right  
of the projected image. (This function can be disabled by  
the menu.)  
4
5
For remote control only:  
R
Y
1
2
Y/C  
DIGITAL ZOOM T/W, QUICK ALIGN., FREEZE, ZOOM T/  
W, FOCUS +/–, SCREEN W/S, PC 1, PC 2, VIDEO, Y/C,  
DVI, COMP.  
6
7
8
G
B
H
V
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
VIDEO  
P
1
6
7
ZOOM T/W buttons  
REMOTE  
Use these buttons to adjust the projected screen size.  
T (Tele): The projected screen size decreases.  
W (Wide):The projected screen size increases.  
IN  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
3
FOCUS +/– buttons  
Use these buttons to adjust the focus of the projected  
video image.  
+ : The focus point becomes more distant.  
– : The focus point becomes nearer.  
9
u
y
t
2
HIDE  
W
3
IN  
OUT  
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
S
VIDEO  
Y/C  
4
6
PC1  
PC2  
DVI  
5
7
8
r
T
T
ZOOM  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
1
PC (computer) 1 input terminal (D-sub 3-row 15  
5
6
Component terminal  
Component signals (Y, B-Y, R-Y) or DTV-format (Y, PB  
R) signals. (Devices which have component output  
terminals can be connected.)  
* For details about DTV-format signals (480i, 480p, 720p,  
1080i) compatible with this unit, refer to page 22.  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
e
w
W
W
8
9
p
MENU button  
,
pin)  
PRESET  
Use this button to enter or exit the menu mode. The main  
menu appears or disappears at the screen. For details,  
refer to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
P
This is an input terminal dedicated to computer signals  
(RGB video signals and sync signals).  
Connect the display output terminal of the computer to  
this terminal. When a Macintosh computer is to be  
connected, use the supplied conversion adapter for Mac.  
9
p
q
EXIT  
ENTER  
Cursor buttons  
5/  
/  
2
/
3
Y/C (S-video) input terminal (Mini DIN 4 pin)  
Connect this terminal to the S-video output terminal of a  
video deck, etc.  
Attach the ferrite core (accessory) to the cable which is  
connected to the Y/C input terminal. (Refer to page 29.)  
These buttons are used in the menu mode to select an  
item or to set or adjust the value. For details, refer to  
“Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Note  
• When computer-related signals are input, the uppermost  
edge of the image may appear to bow if the sync signal  
input is composite sync (Cs) or G on sync signal. In this  
case, use separate sync signals for vertical sync (V) and  
horizontal sync (H).  
ENTER button  
1
2
Remote control’s signal transmitter  
OPERATE button  
This button is used in the menu mode. Use to display the  
hierarchical menus. Also use when “ENTER” is displayed  
against the item on the menu screen or when the “All  
reset” selection is confirmed. For details, refer to “Basic  
Menu Operation” on page 43.  
7
8
VIDEO (composite video) input terminal (BNC)  
Connect this terminal to the composite video output  
terminal of a video deck, etc.  
When the projector is in the stand-by mode, press this  
button one second or more, and the projector is turned  
on, causing the OPERATE indicator to light.  
Press it one second or more again, and the projector  
goes into the cool-down mode, then stand-by mode.  
(Refer to page 32.)  
* The OPERATE button will not work for approximately 1  
minute from when the light-source lamp is turned on. Use  
the button after approximately 1 minute.  
2
PC (computer) OUT terminal (D-sub 3-row 15 pin)  
This is the terminal for video output from the monitor of  
the computer connected to PC1 or PC2.  
REMOTE terminal (stereo mini jack)  
Connect an infrared remote control extension unit, etc. to  
this jack.  
Attach the ferrite core (accessory) to the cable which is  
connected to the REMOTE terminal. (Refer to page 29.)  
* For details, consult your dealer.  
q
w
EXIT button  
This button is used in the menu mode to return to the  
previous menu. When the main menu is displayed, this  
button will cause the menu to disappear. For details, refer  
to “Basic Menu Operation” on page 43.  
The computer input signal projected on the screen is  
output. A display monitor can be used by connecting it to  
this terminal.  
3
4
DVI terminal [DVI-D 24 pin]  
This is the digital RGBHV input terminal.  
• The Mac ADC is not supported.  
PRESET button  
9
RS-232C CONTROL terminal IN/OUT (D-sub 9 pin)  
Memo  
This PRESET button only works as a reset button for the  
direct button adjustment of the KEYSTONE button of the  
control panel and the DIGITAL ZOOM button of the  
remote control. When adjusting the keystone or digital  
zoom (when the setting is displayed on the screen) the  
adjusted value is reset to that which was set when the  
projector was shipped from the factory. Of the menu  
items, this button only works for the keystone setting  
screen.  
This is the RS-232C interface-specified terminal. The  
projector can be controlled by a computer connected  
externally.  
While in the cool-down mode (STAND BY indicator is  
blinking):  
Even if you press the OPERATE button, the projector is not  
turned on. Wait until the projector enters stand-by mode  
(STAND BY indicator stays lit).  
PC (computer) 2 input terminals (BNC × 5)  
These are multipurpose video input terminals that allow  
input of the following signals.  
• Analog RGB signals, vertical sync (V) signals, and  
horizontal sync (H) signals / composite signals (Cs).  
(Devices which have analog RGB signal output  
terminals can be connected.)  
* For details, refer to page 27 and 74.  
3
HIDE button  
Use this button to turn off the image on the screen  
temporarily. Pressing it again makes the image to  
resume. (Refer to page 35.)  
* Input of external sync signals is automatically detected.  
Detection of H/V signals or Cs signals causes automatic  
switching to external sync. The priority order is H/V > Cs.  
e
KEYSTONE  
/
buttons  
Use these buttons to correct a trapezoidal distortion of  
the projected image. (Refer to page 35.)  
4
FREEZE button  
During projection of an image on the screen, press this  
button to obtain a still picture.  
To restore normal projection, press it again. (Refer to  
page 37.)  
* Depending on the video signal source (UXGA, etc.), this  
button does not work.  
Note  
• When computer-related signals are input, the uppermost  
edge of the image may appear to bow if the sync signal  
input is composite sync (Cs) or G on sync signal. In this  
case, use separate sync signals for vertical sync (V) and  
horizontal sync (H).  
12  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and Features  
Controls and Features  
r
DIGITAL ZOOM T/W buttons  
A part of image can be magnified up to four times on the  
screen.  
Each time the T or W button is pressed, the image is  
enlarged or the enlarged image is reduced by a certain  
degree. (Refer to page 37.)  
Installing Batteries  
Install batteries in the remote control. If the remote control has started to work erratically, replace the  
batteries.  
* Images which are enlarged with the digital zoom become  
less clear.  
* Depending on the video signal source (UXGA, etc.), this  
button does not work.  
1
Open the back cover.  
Open the back cover in the direction of the arrow.  
Precautions for using batteries  
If batteries are used incorrectly, they may crack or  
leak liquid. This could cause a fire, burn, malfunction,  
or staining or damaging of the surroundings.  
t
PC buttons  
Use these buttons to select a device connected to the PC  
1, PC 2 or DVI terminals. (Refer to page 33.)  
* “PC 1”, “PC 2” or “DVI” will be displayed on the top right  
of the projected image. (This function can be disabled  
using the menu.)  
Beware of the following:  
• Do not mix new and old batteries.  
• Do not mix different types of batteries as they differ in  
characteristics.  
• Place batteries so they match the polarities indicated:  
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).  
y
u
SCREEN W/S buttons  
Changes the projection screen size to [4:3] or [16:9].  
• Be sure to put the minus (–) end in first to avoid  
short-circulating.  
• Use only designated batteries.  
• Remove the batteries if the remote is not to be used for a  
prolonged period.  
• When the batteries are exhausted, replace them  
immediately. Otherwise, liquid could leak, or malfunction  
could occur due to leaking liquid. If the leaked liquid  
contacts the skin, wipe it off with a cloth, otherwise the skin  
could become rough.  
• Do not put batteries into a fire or try to recharge them.  
• Batteries run for six months to one year in normal use.  
However, the batteries supplied are for confirming  
operation and may not run that long. When the remote  
control starts failing to work properly, replace the batteries  
with new ones.  
QUICK ALIGN. (Quick Alignment) button  
Use this button to automatically align “Horizontal and  
vertical position”, “Tracking” and “Phase” for the  
projected image.  
During the automatic alignment, “Quick Alignment”  
appears on the screen, and disappears after alignment is  
finished. (Refer to page 36.)  
* The “Quick Alignment” function only works when the  
signal is input from the input terminal of PC 1, PC 2 or  
DVI. It does not work when the signal is input from the  
VIDEO IN terminal (VIDEO, Y/C and COMP. input  
terminal).  
2
3
Install the batteries.  
Place the two supplied batteries (AA/R6-size) in the  
remote control as illustrated below.  
CAUTION  
• Automatic alignment with the quick alignment function  
should be carried out on a bright still-picture. This function  
may not work correctly on a dark picture or motion-picture.  
If adjustment with this function is not satisfactory, adjust  
“Horizontal and vertical position”, “Tracking” and “Phase” in  
the menu mode.  
This instruction below applies only to the use in Holland.  
Gebruike batterijen:  
Close the back cover.  
First fit the claws on the back cover in the case, then  
close the back cover in the direction of the arrow.  
13  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Projector  
Installing the Projector  
Adjusting the Inclination of the Projector  
The vertical angle and the leveling of the projector can be adjusted with the adjustable feet at the bottom of the projector.  
Precautions for Installation  
CAUTIONS  
1. Before installation, do not connect the projector’s power cord.  
2. Do not install the projector in the following places:  
• Where there is water, humidity or dust.  
• Where the projector may be subjected to oil, smoke or cigarette smoke.  
• On a soft surface such as a carpet or cushion.  
I
Adjusting the vertical angle of the projector  
While pushing the levers on both sides upward, raise the projector. The adjustable feet automatically extend.  
To retract the feet, push the levers and lower the projector slowly; the projector is fixed at the position  
where you release the levers.  
• Where the projector may be subjected to direct sunlight.  
• Where temperature is high or humidity is low.  
Allowable operation temperature range: +5°C to +35°C  
Allowable relative humidity range: 20% to 80% (no condensation)  
Allowable storage temperature range: –10°C to +60°C  
I
When installing the projector, observe the following:  
• Do not use the projector placed on its side.  
Avoid using the projector placed on its side. This could cause a malfunction.  
• Use the projector within the specified angle.  
Do not use the projector inclined ±30° horizontally (left/right). This could cause color variation or shorten the lamp life.  
• Do not block the exhaust vents.  
lever  
Adjustable feet (at the front)  
Do not use a cover which encloses the projector air-tight or blocks the exhaust vents. Allow sufficient space around the  
projector. When the projector is enclosed in a space of the following dimensions, use an air conditioner so the temperature  
inside becomes equal to the outside temperature.  
I
Leveling the projector  
Lift the projector, rotate the rear adjustable foot, and adjust the horizontal angle until the projector is level.  
Allowable minimum space required  
300mm  
200mm  
Adjustable foot (at the rear)  
Fixing foot (at the rear)  
600mm  
Extend  
Shorten  
300mm  
200mm  
16  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Projector  
Installing the Projector  
Installing the Projector against the Screen  
Projection Distance and Screen Size  
The projector should be placed so that the center line of the lens is at a right angle to the screen as shown in the following  
figures.  
• The range of projection distances that can be focused depends on the lens unit (optional) to be used. When the aspect ratio  
of the screen is 4:3, the range is as follows and you need to install the projector within this range.  
I
Side view  
I
Top view  
Lens type  
Approximate projection distance  
0.77 m to 4.03 m  
1.76 m to 4.50 m  
2.77 m to 19.71 m  
4.74 m to 29.87 m  
GL-M2910G  
GL-M2915SG  
GL-M2920ZG  
GL-M2930SZG  
*: The value for projection distance is a guide (reference) one. The projected image size may vary depending on the  
manufacturing tolerance of the projection lens.  
Change of projection screen  
according to aspect ratio  
Screen  
Screen with 4:3 aspect ratio  
I
Trapezoidal-distortion correctable maximum angle  
The projector has a function to correct the trapezoidal distortion of the projected image on the screen.  
To correct this distortion, use the KEYSTONE buttons on the projector. (Refer to “Removing the Trapezoidal Distortion of the  
Image” on page 35.) Also, correction is possible by using the “Keystone” menu. (Refer to “Setting and Adjusting Other  
Functions (OPTIONS)” on page 54.)  
Correctable angle:  
Correctable angle:  
Screen with 16:9 aspect ratio  
90˚  
90˚  
90˚  
Center line of the lens  
To move the Shift position by 50%, set the bottom edge of the projec-  
tion screen so that it is at the same height as the center of the lens.  
Notes  
• For detailed relationship between projection distances and projection screen sizes, refer to Appendix A. The relationships for  
both 4:3 and 16:9 ratios are listed there.  
• When installing a screen, use a 4:3 aspect-ratio picture.  
Up to approx. 20° downward from the horizontal line  
Up to approx. 20° upward from the horizontal line  
• (A 16 : 9 aspect-ratio picture is projected based on the width of the range in which a 4:3 aspect-ratio picture is projected.)  
• The diagonal length of a 16:9 aspect-ratio screen is about 91.8% that of a 4:3 aspect-ratio screen. This value is only a guide  
(reference).  
• If sunlight or lamp light strikes the projection screen directly, the picture tends to become pale and dim. Use a curtain or  
other means to shield the light.  
• Set the projector horizontally on a surface that is within the range of adjustable angles (up/down adjustment angle: +7° ;  
horizontal adjustment angle: ±1.5°).  
• If the keystone is adjusted, the projected screen becomes smaller.  
• When hanging from the ceiling, use a dedicated hanging fixture (not supplied).  
I Optional Lenses  
This projector does not include a lens. You can select one of the optional lenses to adjust the projection distance. Please ask  
your authorized dealer or service center to install the lens.  
Lens model  
Function  
GL-M2910G  
Powered focus for rear projection, short focal length (subject ratio 1:1), 0% influence.  
Powered focus, short focal length (subject ratio 1.5:1), powered image adjustment (2%  
zoom), includes manual vertical shift function, 30%-55% influence  
GL-M2915SG  
GL-M2920ZG  
GL-M2930SZG  
Powered zoom/powered focus lens (subject ratio 2:1-3:1), 50% influence.  
Powered zoom/powered focus long focal length lens (subject ratio 2.9:1-5.5:1), includes  
manual vertical shift function, 30%-55% influence.  
17  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Projector  
Installing the Projector  
Effective Range and Distance of the Remote Control Unit  
The remote control unit can be used as either a wireless remote control unit or a wired one.  
Setting the Amount of Lens Shifting  
When the lens unit (optional) with the lens shifting function is used, the projected screen can be shifted up and down in  
position.  
I
Using as a wireless remote control unit  
Aim the remote control unit toward the remote sensor on the front or the rear of the projector.  
Notes  
The operable distance of the remote control unit is about 10 m for direct reception. The remote control unit can be used by  
having it reflected on the screen. In this case, the total distance of “A+B” should be about 10 m or less. The operable angles  
of the remote control unit are 15° right and left, and 15° up and down.  
• The amount of shifting is within the range of approx. 30% to 55%.  
• After finishing the lens shift setting, tighten the SHIFT LOCK fixing bolt firmly so that the lens will not move.  
1
2
Turn the cap on the top of the projector to open it.  
Screen  
Loosen the SHIFT LOCK fixing bolt.  
Use the hex. wrench supplied.  
3
Rotate the LENS SHIFT knob to adjust the position (shift amount) of the projected  
screen.  
Rotate it to the right: The lens shifts upward.  
Rotate it to the left: The lens shifts downward.  
15˚  
15˚  
4
5
Tighten the SHIFT LOCK fixing bolt firmly.  
Use the hex. wrench supplied.  
Projector  
15˚  
A
15˚  
B
Turn the cap to close it.  
SHIFT LOCK fixing bolt  
LENS SHIFT knob  
Remote control unit  
I Projected screen position image by amount of shift  
* The projected screen position can only shift in an up-and-down direction.  
The illustration shows the screen shifted sidewise for the purpose of explanation.  
Approx. 55%  
Approx. 50%  
Approx. 30%  
20  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the Projector  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Before connection, be sure to turn off the projector and connected devices.  
Read the manual which comes with each device thoroughly.  
Setting the Position Selecting Screw for Ceiling Mounting  
When using the projector in an upside-down, ceiling-mounted position (inverted top-to-bottom and right-to-left), the “position  
selecting screw for ceiling mounting” must be turned to switch to ceiling mounting.  
This will correct variance in color images (shading), which otherwise would occur in ceiling mounting.  
To revert to normal desktop setting, turn the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting” back to the initial position (factory-  
shipped).  
Signals that Can Be Input to the Projector  
The following signals can be input to the projector:  
I Video signals  
When using the projector in an upside-down, ceiling-mounted position:  
Turn the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting” fully counterclockwise (until it is turning idly).  
(1) Response to color systems  
Color systems  
To again use the projector in a normal desktop setting:  
Turn the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting” fully clockwise (until it firmly tightens).  
NTSC  
NTSC4.43  
PAL  
SECAM  
Input terminal  
VIDEO  
- - - - -  
*2  
For normal desktop mounting:  
Turn the screw clockwise.  
For upside-down, ceiling-mounting:  
Turn the screw counterclockwise.  
*1  
*2  
*2  
Y/C  
Y, PB/B-Y, PR/R-Y  
G, B, R, H/CS, V  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
*2  
CAUTIONS  
*1:Responds if Y/C output is available.  
*2:Signifies that component signals (“Y, PB, PR” / “Y, B-Y, R-Y” / “G, B, R, H/CS, V”) conform to the signal timing  
(synchronization and video period) of each color system. The color systems are used for convenience only.  
To ceiling-mount and adjust the projector, special expertise and technique are  
necessary. Be sure to ask your dealer or a specialist to perform this work.  
To turn the “position selecting screw for ceiling mounting”, use a Phillips  
screwdriver with a 30-mm or longer shank.  
(2) Response to double density (*3), high-vision signals  
The screw is located in the hole shown in the illustration.  
NTSC*4  
NTSC*5  
Input terminal  
Y, PB/B-Y, PR/R-Y  
G, B, R, H/CS, V  
High-vision signal  
Position selecting screw for ceiling mounting  
Note  
• When using the projector in a ceiling-mounted position, you should reverse the projected image by changing the settings of  
Right Left rev. and Top Bottom inv. menus. For details, refer to page 54. You can also change these settings without  
receiving a video signal. In this case, refer to “Menu Transition Diagram in No signal Menu Mode” on page 38.  
*3:Signals whose density of scanning lines/field is twice as high.  
*4:Responds to signals whose horizontal scanning frequency is 31.5 kHz. NTSC can be made twice as dense by a line  
doubler (separately available: recommended article). Also, possible to respond to fully-specified, decoded  
wide-clear-vision signal and decoded 525P progressive signal.  
*5:Responds to signals whose horizontal scanning frequency is 33.5 kHz. PAL can be made twice as dense by a line doubler  
(separately available: recommended article).  
When installing (adjusting/setting) the unit  
• When using “Top Bottom inv.” on the “Options” menu, reset the unit by following the procedure below.  
• This reset procedure must be performed before operating the unit.  
1. Change the “Top Bottom inv.” Setting on the “Options” menu.  
2. Press the OPERATE button to enter the unit into the stand-by mode.  
3. Press the OPERATE button again to turn on the unit.  
• Adjust the focus after projecting a picture for 30 minutes or longer.  
(3) Response to DTV-format signals  
DTV-format signals (480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i) can be input to the Y, PB/B-Y, PR/R-Y, G, B, R, H/CS, V input terminal.  
I Computer signals  
Signals with the following scanning frequencies can be input to the PC 1 or PC 2 (G, B, R, H/CS, V) and DVI terminals.  
Horizontal scanning frequency  
Vertical scanning frequency  
15kHz - 105kHz  
50Hz - 100Hz  
Be sure that the computer to be used suffices the following conditions:  
• The computer has the video signal output port.  
Be sure that the computer has the video signal output port by reading the instruction book of the computer.  
The video signal output port is generally called as “RGB port”, “monitor port”, or “video port”. If the computer-monitor hybrid  
type or note type is used, it may need to prepare for an external output port. Also, there will be the type to which an external  
output port cannot be installed.  
• DVI input  
During DVI input, depending on the computer settings, there may be no signal input or an error may occur (blue screen).  
If this happens, turn off the power to both the projector and the computer, and then turn the projector back on before turning  
the computer on again. Then correctly set the computer's graphic board.  
• The resolution and the scanning frequencies are within the range specified in the table on page 23.  
Be sure that the resolution and the scanning frequencies of the video signal are within the range. A video signal out of range  
cannot be used. (Even signals out of the range could be projected. However, it may not sharp enough. On the other hand,  
even some of the signals within the range may require adjustment depending on the video board used.)  
When a signal other than listed in the table on page 23 is input, the image could be partially erased or an unneeded fold-over  
image could appear.  
Even signals in the frequency range that can be input may not be displayed normally depending on the type of the signal.  
Composite sync (CS) and G on Sync signals cannot be handled depending on the devices connected.  
21  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Various Devices  
I Allowable input signals  
Connecting to Video Devices  
Horizontal res- Vertical resolu- Horizontal fre-  
Vertical fre-  
quency  
V [Hz]  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and video device.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with each video device.  
• Use the supplied video cable. An video cable with an S-video (Y/C) terminal is not supplied.  
Signal  
olution  
tion  
quency  
Hor [Pixels]  
Ver [Lines]  
H [kHz]  
PC system  
PC98  
PC/AT  
DOS/V  
DVI*  
VESA350  
640  
350  
37.86  
84.13  
PC98  
640  
640  
400  
480  
24.83  
31.47  
37.86  
37.50  
43.27  
35.16  
37.88  
48.08  
46.88  
53.67  
35.52  
48.36  
56.48  
60.02  
68.68  
46.43  
63.98  
79.98  
91.15  
75.00  
35.00  
49.73  
60.24  
68.68  
33.75  
33.72  
31.47  
45.00  
44.96  
33.75  
33.72  
27.00  
15.734  
15.625  
15.625  
56.42  
59.94  
72.81  
75.00  
85.01  
56.25  
60.32  
72.19  
75.00  
85.06  
43.48  
60.00  
70.07  
75.03  
85.00  
43.44  
60.02  
75.03  
85.02  
60.00  
66.67  
74.55  
74.93  
75.06  
60.00  
59.94  
59.94  
60.00  
59.94  
60.00  
59.94  
24.00  
60  
VGA 60Hz*  
VGA 72Hz*  
VGA 75Hz*  
VGA 85Hz*  
SVGA 56Hz*  
SVGA 60Hz*  
SVGA 72Hz*  
SVGA 75Hz*  
SVGA 85Hz*  
XGA 43Hz*  
XGA 60Hz*  
XGA 70Hz*  
XGA 75Hz*  
XGA 85Hz*  
SXGA 43Hz*  
SXGA 60Hz*  
SXGA 75Hz*  
SXGA 85Hz*  
UXGA 60Hz  
MAC13  
640  
480  
640  
480  
To AV IN  
R
Y
640  
480  
Y/C  
BNC-RCAconversion  
800  
600  
G
B
H
V
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
plug (accessory)  
800  
600  
VO  
P
800  
600  
800  
600  
REMOTE  
800  
600  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1280  
1600  
640  
768/2  
768  
S-video cable  
(separately available)  
IN  
768  
768  
IN  
OUT  
Video cable  
(accessory)  
768  
1024/2  
1024  
1024  
1024  
1200  
480  
Video devices  
• VCR (Video cassette recorder)  
• Laser videodisc player  
Mac  
MAC16  
832  
624  
MAC19  
1024  
1152  
768  
MAC21  
870  
• Camcorder  
Video system  
Video  
HDTV (1035i) 60Hz  
HDTV (1035i) 59Hz  
480p  
720  
1280  
1280  
1920  
1920  
1920  
483  
720  
720p 60Hz  
720p 59Hz  
1080i 60Hz  
1080i 59Hz  
1080 24sF  
NTSC  
720  
1080/2  
1080/2  
1080  
Notes  
• Connect a composite image signal output device or Y/C (S-video) image output device.  
• When connecting the S-video cable, refer to “How to attach the ferrite core” on page 29.  
PAL  
50  
Memo  
SECAM  
50  
• When connecting a video device, use a TBC along with it, or one which has a built-in TBC.  
* A signal that can be input by DVI (V-sync 85Hz is not supported.)  
• Use of an extension cable to connect a video device and the projector could cause video degradation.  
• When a signal with much jitter is reproduced on a VCR, or special-effect playback is performed, the upper part of the image  
or the image itself may be erased or distorted.  
Notes  
• The resolution for the input signals is listed in the above table.  
• Even signals in the frequency range that can be input may not be displayed normally depending on the type of the signal.  
• When a signal other than listed above is input, the image could be partially erased or an unneeded fold-over image could  
appear.  
• Some signals other than listed above can be displayed. But they may require adjustment.  
• Even some of the signals listed above may require adjustment depending on the video board used.  
• Composite sync (CS) and G on Sync signals cannot be handled depending on the devices connected.  
• The VGA signal of the PC system could be displayed in 480p mode of the VIDEO system. (In this case, the projector enters  
video menu mode when the MENU button is pressed.)  
24  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Hi-Vision Devices/DVD Players  
Connecting to Other Devices  
Before connecting, be sure to turn off both the projector and Hi-Vision devices/DVD players.  
• Thoroughly read the manual that comes with each Hi-Vision device or DVD player.  
• Use separately available BNC cables to connect Hi-Vision devices and DVD players.  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and other devices to be connected.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with the device to be connected.  
• Use the supplied video cable or the cable supplied with the game device.  
To Y  
To PC 2  
Y
Y/C  
R
Y
To PB/B-Y  
Y/C  
H
V
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
BNC-RCA conversion  
plug (accessory)  
G
B
H
V
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
To PR/R-Y  
VIDEO  
P
To VIDEO  
V
P
REMOTE  
To AV IN  
REMOTE  
IN  
IN  
Cable supplied with the  
game device, or supplied  
video cable  
IN  
OUT  
BNC cable  
(separately available)  
IN  
OUT  
Game device, etc.  
Hi-Vision devices  
DVD player  
• W-VHS VCR  
• Text/video camera  
• Hi-Vision video camera  
Note  
• Connect a component signal output device or DTV-format signal output device.  
Memo  
• Other devices with component signal output terminals (DVD player (NTSC), etc.) can be connected.  
(*DVD: Digital Video Disc)  
• DTV-format signals (480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i) can be input. For DTV-format signals which can be handled, refer to “Video  
signals” on page 22.  
25  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Computer Devices  
Connecting to Devices which Control the Projector  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and computer devices.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with each device.  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and devices to be connected.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with each device to be connected.  
• By connecting a computer to the RS-232C terminal, you can control the projector. Also, you can make an infrared remote  
sensor extension unit and connect it to the REMOTE terminal of the projector.  
* Obtain connection cables as required. Use a reverse connection cable.  
I Connection to an IBM PC or IBM-compatible computer  
• Use the supplied personal computer connection cable. Also, prepare cables required for connecting the devices  
connected.  
* For details, refer to “RS-232C external control” on page 74.  
* For further details, consult your dealer or an authorized service center.  
• Desktop type  
To PC 1  
R
Personal Computer  
Y
To monitor  
connector  
To PC 2  
Y/C  
connection cable (supplied)  
To R  
R
G
B
H
V
P
B/B-Y  
R/R-Y  
Y
To G  
To B  
To PC 1  
VIDEO  
G
B
H
V
PB-Y  
P
To PC OUT  
TO CONTROL  
REMOTE  
PR/R-Y  
• Notebook type  
Cable  
supplied  
To H/Cs  
To V  
with the  
display (or  
separately  
available)  
(D-sub 3-  
row 15-pin)  
IN  
IN  
• Desktop type  
IN  
OUT  
* There are some notebook types which  
do not allow the computer’s LCD to work  
if an external display is connected. With  
such a notebook computer, the LCD  
display and external display output  
need to be switched.  
To PC 2  
IN  
*
To PC 2  
To RS-232C connector  
Separate cable (separately available)  
• Desktop type  
To RS-232C connector  
To monitor connector  
Infrared remote sensor  
extension unit  
• Note type  
(Needs to be made)  
• RGB output devices  
To R  
To G  
RS-232C reverse  
connection cable  
(separately available)  
* By directly connecting the OUT terminal  
to the second DLA-G150CLE IN  
terminal, a number of DLA-G150CLE  
units can be controlled by a single  
computer.  
To B  
Laser video disc  
player, etc.  
POWER  
To RS-232C connector  
To H/Cs  
Display monitor  
To V  
Note  
• When connecting the cable to the REMOTE terminal, refer to “How to attach the ferrite core” on page 29.  
* When a display monitor is connected to  
the PC OUT terminal, you can view the  
video from the computer on the monitor.  
28  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to Various Devices  
Connecting to DVI  
Connecting the Power Cord  
Before connection, be sure to turn off both the projector and computer devices.  
• Read thoroughly the manual that comes with each device.  
After all devices have been finished being connected, connect the supplied power cord. At this time, do not yet turn on the  
MAIN POWER switch.  
1
Insert the supplied power cord into the  
power input terminal of the projector.  
R
E
T
N
E
O
E
D
I
U N  
E
M
C
P
V
T
I
X
E
E
T
A
R
E
P
O
T
E
S E  
E
N
O
R
P
P
M
E
E
D
I
H
T
S Y E  
K
T
P
M
A
L
N
W
O
D
P
U
R
Y
G
P
P
Ferrite core  
B
H
V
2
Insert the main plug of the supplied  
power cord into a suitable wall outlet.  
DVI (DVI-D 24pin Cable)  
DOS/V  
(Available separately)  
Power cord (supplied)  
IN  
(DVI VIDEO BOARD)  
IN  
for European continent countries  
for United Kingdom  
for European  
continent countries  
for United Kingdom  
Note  
Note  
• Other connections are the same as in the connection example for IBM PC or IBM compatible PCs.  
• The power cord for the United Kingdom is only included as  
a special accessory when shipped to the United Kingdom. It  
is not included when shipped to European continent  
countries.  
How to attach the ferrite core  
Attach the ferrite core when using the S-video cable or infrared remote sensor extension unit which are sold separately.  
However, use a cable that can be wound once.  
CAUTIONS  
CAUTIONS  
To prevent fire and electric shock, observe the  
following:  
• When you do not use devices, pull out their power cords  
from wall outlets.  
• Do not connect the devices with power cords other than  
those supplied.  
• Do not use mains voltage other than the power voltage  
indicated.  
1
Release the stopper at each end and  
open the ferrite core.  
• Since the power requirement of the projector is high, insert  
the power plug directly into a wall outlet.  
• Use the supplied power cord with the ferrite core only.  
• Do not remove the ferrite core from the supplied power  
cord; Otherwise, there may be a possibility that a harmful  
interference occurs.  
Stoppers  
Wind the cable once.  
2
Wind the cord around the ferrite core.  
Attach the ferrite core about 3 cm from the end of the  
• Do not scar, damage, or work on the power cords. Also, do  
not put a heavy object on, heat, or stretch the power cords,  
otherwise they may be damaged.  
cord.  
• Do not insert or pull out the plugs with a wet hand.  
Removing the Lens Cap  
Remove the lens cap before using the projector.  
Notes  
3
Close the ferrite core with the cord  
inside until you hear it click shut.  
Click!  
Note  
• The lens cap is supplied with the lens unit (optional). It  
should be attached to the lens when the projector is not  
used.  
• When connecting, connect the terminal which is at the  
ferrite core end of the cord to the projector.  
• Do not operate the projector with the lens cap attached.  
Doing so can deform the lens cap because of the heat. A  
metallic lens cap can get hot and cause injury.  
29  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
I
A
R
E
P
OFF [‡  
                                                                                                                                                                                                                           
]:The MAIN POWER switch turns off and the  
STAND BY indicator goes off.  
Projector  
Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
The following describes the basic procedure for normal use  
of the projector.  
I Projector’s buttons  
I Lamp control settings  
After turning the power on, first perform the lamp control settings on the setting menu referring to “Setting and Adjusting Other  
Functions (OPTIONS)” on page 54.  
STAND BY indicator  
OPERATE indicator  
STAND BY  
LAMP  
TEMP  
1. Turning on the Power  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
OPERATE button  
There are 3 modes in the lamp control settings.  
1: NORMAL MODE (Normal)  
1
Turn on the MAIN POWER switch.  
ON [ I ]:The main power turns on and the STAND BY  
PC  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
Used as a normal lamp.  
The projector is set to “Normal” mode at the time of purchase.  
VIDEO  
MENU  
indicator comes on.  
Projector’s indicator  
* “Lamp replacement” appears on the screen when the lamp use time exceeds 1000 hours.  
2: LIGHT POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC)  
Automatically controls the power used by the lamp and increases it in steps. When this mode is used, the brightness  
starts at approximately 70%. The decrease in brightness is slower than in “Normal” mode and this mode is best suited  
when using the projector continuously for long periods of time.  
* “Lamp replacement” appears on the screen when the lamp use time exceeds 2000 hours.  
3: LIGHT OUTPUT CONTROL MODE (LOC)  
The brightness can be set in seven levels (-6 to 0). Since the brightness can be set in steps, this is the mode best suited  
for adjusting multiple screens. This setting can also be changed while the projector is being used. To change the setting,  
choose LOC with the 5/cursors and choose the level with the 2/3cursors.  
* “Lamp replacement” appears on the screen when the lamp use time exceeds 2000 hours.  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
EXIT  
ENTER  
2
Press the OPERATE button for one  
second or more.  
• The OPERATE indicator lights and the projected  
screen slowly appears.  
R
E
T
N
E
O
E
D
I
U N  
E
M
C
P
V
X
E
E
T
O
T
E
S E  
E
N
O
T
R
P
P
M
E
T
E
D
I
H
S Y E  
K
P
M
A
L
N
W
O
D
P
U
Remote control unit  
Projector  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
OPERATE  
or  
The lamp replacement time is different for the 3 modes.  
1: NORMAL MODE (Normal) ... 1000 hours  
2: LIGHT POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC) ... 2000 hours  
Notes  
3: LIGHT OUTPUT CONTROL MODE (LOC) ... 2000 hours  
* These lamp replacement times are only a rough guide as to how long the lamp will last if these modes are used from the  
beginning. These are not guaranteed service lives.  
• After the power is turned on, the image may be jumbled for  
a few seconds, but this is not a malfunction.  
• After the indicator comes on, it can take a minute or so for  
the lamp to warm up and operate consistently.  
Notes  
• Although the LIGHT OUTPUT CONTROL MODE (LOC) and LIGHT POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC) electrically control  
the brightness of the lamp and extend the replacement time longer than that for the NORMAL MODE, the service life of the  
lamp is approximately 1000 hours.  
• The lamp will gradually become less bright in each mode.  
Since the lamp may become less bright quickly in some usage environments, replace the lamp if you notice that it is no  
longer bright even if the lamp has not yet reached the end of its life.  
I Turning off the Power  
1
Press the OPERATE button for one  
second or more.  
I Remote control unit  
• The STAND BY indicator changes to blinking, and the  
projector goes into cool-down mode. The cool-down  
mode will continue for approximately 120 seconds.  
• Mode settings  
* If the projector is not put in stand-by mode or turned off after the lamp has been used continuously in the normal mode for  
more than 1000 hours (but less than 2010 hours), it can be used for “up to 2010 hours”.  
However, if the projector is put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can not be turned back on again.  
* If the projector is put in stand-by mode or turned off after the lamp has been used in the light output control mode or light  
power control mode for more than 2000 hours (but less than 2010 hours), it can not be turned back on again.  
However, if the projector is not put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can be used for “up to 2010 hours”.  
* If the projector is used in the light output control mode or light power control mode for more than 1000 hours, and then  
switched to the normal mode, put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can not be turned back on again.  
Remote control unit  
Projector (Blinking)  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
OPERATE button  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
W
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
S
VIDEO  
Y/C  
PC1  
PC2  
DVI  
T
T
ZOOM  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
W
W
PRESET  
Note  
After performing the above settings, perform the necessary settings.  
• The OPERATE button will not work for approximately 1  
minute from when the light-source lamp is turned on. Use  
the button after approximately 1 minute.  
EXIT  
ENTER  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
2
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch after  
the STAND BY indicator changes to  
steady on.  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
CAUTION  
• Do not turn off the MAIN POWER switch during cool-down  
mode (the STAND BY indicator blinking). Turn it off after  
the STAND BY indicator becomes on (stand-by mode).  
32  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
I Projector’s buttons  
I Projector’s buttons  
2. Select the Input source to be Projected  
3. Adjust the Screen Size (Zooming)  
Press the VIDEO button or the PC button to switch the input.  
• Each time you press either button, the selected input  
changes as follows. The selected name appears on the top  
right of the image on the screen for five seconds. (Called  
line display.)  
How to adjust the projected screen size differs depending on  
the lens unit (optional) you are using.  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
LAMP  
TEMP  
STAND BY  
LAMP  
TEMP  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
GL-M2910G (without zooming function):  
The projected screen size cannot be changed.  
HIDE  
PC  
PC  
PC button  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
GL-M2915SG/GL-M2920ZG/GL-M2930SZG (with  
zooming function):  
Adjust the projected screen size with the following buttons on  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
When selecting an image device connected to the  
AV IN (VIDEO, Y/C or COMP) terminal:  
VIDEO  
MENU  
VIDEO  
MENU  
VIDEO button  
PRESET button  
EXIT button  
Projector  
Press VIDEO.  
the remote control unit.  
Note  
The input mode changes as follows every time the button is  
EXIT  
ENTER  
pressed.  
VIDEO Y/C COMP  
• The function of GL-M2915SG is to adjust the view angle  
zooming by 2%. (For fine view angle adjustment)  
EXIT  
ENTER  
I Remote control unit  
Remote control unit  
Press the “VIDEO”, “Y/C” or “COMP” button.  
To enlarge the projected screen size  
Press the ZOOM W (Wide) button.  
I Remote control unit  
VIDEO: The image from the VIDEO input terminal on the  
side of the unit is projected.  
To reduce the screen size  
Press the ZOOM T (Tele) button.  
Y/C:  
The image from the Y/C input terminal on the side of  
the unit is projected.  
Remote control unit  
T
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
PC button  
HIDE  
OPERATE  
W
COMP: The image from the COMP (Y, RB/B-Y, PR/R-Y)  
input terminal on the side of the unit is projected.  
* When there is no signal from the selected input terminal  
(No signal), “No Input” is displayed.  
W
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
S
VIDEO  
Y/C  
HIDE  
W
SCREEN W/S button  
VIDEO button  
ZOOM button  
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
PC1  
PC2  
DVI  
S
4. Adjust Focus  
PC1  
PC2  
T
DVI  
T
T
ZOOM  
FOCUS +/– button  
ZOOM T/W button  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
W
W
T
ZOOM  
Adjust focus with the following buttons on the remote control unit.  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
When selecting a device such as a computer  
which is connected to the PC1, PC2 or DVI  
terminal:  
W
W
PRESET  
To focus on farther points:  
Press the FOCUS + button.  
PRESET button  
EXIT button  
EXIT  
ENTER  
To focus on nearer points:  
Press the FOCUS – button.  
Remote control unit  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Projector  
Press PC.  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
The input mode changes as follows every time the button is  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
FOCUS  
pressed.  
PC1 PC2 DVI  
I Language display  
Remote control unit  
Press the “PC1”, “PC2” or “DVI” button.  
5. Setting the Screen Aspect Ratio  
The display languages of the menus, direct buttons  
(DIGITAL ZOOM, KEYSTONE, etc) and messages is set to  
“ENGLISH” when the projector is bought. The display  
language can be selected from the following 6 languages:  
PC1: The image from the PC1 input terminal on the side of  
the unit is projected.  
PC2: The image from the PC2 input terminal on the side of  
the unit is projected.  
Set in accordance with the screen aspect ratio that will be  
used. When a screen aspect ratio of 16:9 is used, a 4:3  
image can be projected within the screen without using the  
zoom function.  
(Japanese)”, “English (English)”, “Deutsch  
DVI: The image from the DVI input terminal on the side of  
the unit is projected.  
* When there is no signal from the selected input terminal  
(No signal), “No Input” is displayed.  
(German)”, “Español (Spanish)”, “Italiano (Italian)” and  
“Français (French)”. (Refer to page 46.) However, some  
words (VIDEO, NTSC, Quick Alignment, etc) are only  
displayed in English.  
When using a 16:9 screen:  
Press the “W” button.  
When using a 4:3 screen:  
Press the “S” button.  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
Remote control unit  
W
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
S
VIDEO  
PC  
SCREEN  
S
PC1  
PC2  
DVI  
Y/C  
VIDEO  
* There is no button on the unit.  
* This setting can also be performed from the menu. (Refer  
to page 46.)  
[Screen display]  
• When using a screen with a 16:9 aspect ratio  
When set to “S” (4:3)  
* If a 4:3 image is projected, some  
parts of the top and bottom of the  
image may not be displayed.  
Line Display  
VIDEO  
PC 1  
PC 2  
Y/C  
COMP  
DVI  
Q U I K A L I G N M T  
VIDEO  
* To show the line display (Y/C, VIDEO, COMP, PC1, PC2 or  
DVI) or not is selectable by the menu. Refer to “Setting and  
Adjusting Other Functions (OPTIONS)” on page 54.  
When set to “W” (16:9)  
* A 4:3 image will be displayed in full  
Note  
in the middle of the screen.  
• When no image signal is input to the selected input  
terminal, the message “No Input” is displayed on the  
screen. (Refer to page 67.)  
33  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Basic Operations  
I Remote control unit  
I Projector’s buttons  
Quick Alignment Function  
(QUICK ALIGN.)  
Turning off Image (HIDE)  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
Video image can be temporarily turned off.  
LAMP  
TEMP  
The Quick Alignment function automatically adjusts (sets)  
the screen settings of the image input from the PC1, PC2 or  
DVI input terminals. This can only be performed from the  
remote control.  
Press the HIDE button once:  
Video image instantly turn off.  
HIDE  
HIDE  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
button  
OPERATE  
PC  
Press the HIDE button again:  
Video image come on again.  
Remote control unit  
QUICK ALIGN.  
HIDE  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
KEYSTONE  
buttons  
W
button  
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
VIDEO  
MENU  
/
S
Projector  
PC1  
PC2  
T
DVI  
While projecting an image on the screen, press the QUICK  
ALIGN. button on the remote control.  
Quick alignment is conducted to obtain best image.  
* During the automatic alignment, “Quick Alignment” appears  
on the screen, and then disappears when the alignment is  
completed.  
HIDE  
PRESET  
button  
T
ZOOM  
HIDE  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
W
W
PRESET  
EXIT  
button  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Note  
EXIT  
ENTER  
I Remote control unit  
• When the projected image input is changed, the HIDE  
function is canceled and the image return.  
Remote control unit  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Removing the Trapezoidal Distortion of  
the Image  
HIDE button  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
If the image projected on the screen is distorted in trapezoid  
form, correct it with the KEYSTONE buttons on the projector.  
When the KEYSTONE button is pressed, “Keystone”  
appears on the screen together with the level bar and set  
value (–80 to 128). When “15 sec.” is displayed in the menu,  
“Keystone” will appear in approximately 15 seconds.  
[Screen display]  
W
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
S
PC1  
PC2  
T
DVI  
KEYSTONE  
T
ZOOM  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
/
buttons  
W
W
PRESET  
PRESET button  
Q u i c k A l i g n m e n t  
Keystone  
123  
EXIT button  
EXIT  
ENTER  
When you press the KEYSTONE  
The trapezoid form is corrected as shown in the figure.  
When you press the KEYSTONE button:  
button:  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
The top bottom inverted trapezoid form is corrected as  
shown in the figure.  
* To cancel correction and restore the original screen, press  
the PRESET button. (Adjusted value:0)  
* Press the EXIT button to immediately remove the keystone  
display.  
Notes  
• This only works for the signals input from the PC1, PC2 or  
DVI input terminals. It does not work for the signals input  
from the AV IN terminal (VIDEO, Y/C or COMP input  
terminal).  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
• The quick alignment function is used to automatically adjust  
the “Horizontal and vertical position”, “Phase” and  
“Tracking” of the projected image.  
KEYSTONE  
KEYSTONE  
• When using the quick alignment function to automatically  
adjust the image, use a bright, still-picture. It may not  
function correctly on a dark or motion picture. If the results  
obtained with the quick alignment function are not  
satisfactory, manually adjust the “Horizontal and vertical  
position”, “Phase” and “Tracking” of the projected image.  
Projected image with trapezoidal distortion  
KEYSTONE  
KEYSTONE  
Notes  
• The trapezoidal distortion (keystone) can be adjusted from  
the option menu. (Refer to page 54.)  
• The range of the trapezoidal distortion adjustment is  
approximately 20° in the vertical direction.  
• Interference patterns may appear on the screen when  
adjusting the keystone. This is not a malfunction.  
• Depending on the type of signal, some noise may appear in  
the picture when the keystone is adjusted.  
This is not a malfunction.  
36  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations  
Menu Operations  
You can adjust picture quality, set functions, get information on the input video signal, etc. using the menus. From the  
following menu transition diagrams, you can see the overall menus and basic button operation in menu mode. Note that there  
are three menu modes, No signal menu mode, video menu mode and PC menu mode. When the MENU button is pressed,  
the projector enters one of these modes by judging the input signal being received.  
I Remote control unit  
Displaying a Still Picture (FREEZE)  
While projecting an image, a still picture is obtained at any  
time by using the FREEZE button on the remote control.  
When you press the FREEZE button:  
I Menu Transition Diagram in No signal Menu Mode  
This is displayed if there is no signal from the selected input terminal.  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
“FREEZE” appears on the screen for a few seconds and  
then the still picture is shown on the screen. Refer to the  
FREEZE message shown on the left of this page.  
* To forcibly clear “FREEZE”, press the EXIT button.  
HIDE  
W
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
Main menu in No signal Menu Mode  
Submenus in No signal Menu Mode  
S
FREEZE button  
PC1  
PC2  
T
DVI  
DIGITAL ZOOM  
T/W button  
When you press the FREEZE button again.  
The original image resumes.  
T
ZOOM  
Press 5/to select an item.  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set the value.  
W
W
PRESET  
Menu  
PRESET button  
EXIT button  
Remote control unit  
FREEZE  
Cursor buttons  
5// 2/3  
Set up  
EXIT  
ENTER  
3or ENTER  
Sync level  
Low  
Std  
High  
Set up  
Sync level  
Sync timing  
Sync timing  
Notes  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Options  
EXIT  
• During freezing, the picture sent from the signal source is  
lost.  
Language  
Information  
• If any of the inoperative buttons (“MENU”, “QUICK ALIGN.”,  
“KEYSTONE”) are pressed while displaying a still picture,  
“FREEZE” is displayed on the screen.  
FREEZE message  
5
Press 5/to select an item.  
5
• This function will not work with some signal sources  
(UXGA, etc). In this case, the FREEZE inhibit message  
appears for a few seconds, as shown on the left. To forcibly  
clear this message, press the EXIT button.  
Menu  
Language  
3or  
Set up  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
ENTER  
FREEZE  
Zooming a Part of the Image  
(DIGITAL ZOOM T/W)  
Options  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
A part of the image being projected can be digitally magnified up  
to four times. When the DIGITAL ZOOM T or W button is  
pressed, “Digital zoom” appears on the screen together with the  
FREEZE inhibit message  
5
level bar and magnifying power (  
2.5, 3.2, 4.0). When “15 sec.” is displayed in the menu,  
“Digital zoom” will appear in approximately 15 seconds.  
×1.0,  
×1.2,  
×1.4,  
×1.6,  
×2.0,  
×
×
×
Menu  
Input  
PC1  
Digital zoom  
1.2  
Set up  
Switcher  
CH.0  
123 h  
• To zoom up or zoom down, press the DIGITAL ZOOM T or  
W button on the remote control.  
FREEZE  
Options  
Remote control unit  
T
Language  
Information  
Lamp time  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
W
DIGITAL ZOOM inhibit message  
I Quick Reference Guide for No signal Menu Mode  
Moving the zoomed image:  
While “Digital zoom” appears on the screen, you can move  
the zoomed image with the cursor (5//2/3) button on the  
remote control.  
Main Menu in No signal Menu Mode  
Set up  
Sync level:  
Sync timing:  
Low. Std*. High.  
3-5  
5: Upper part of the image will be  
displayed.  
: Lower part of the image will be  
displayed.  
2: Left side part of the image will  
be displayed.  
Options  
D.ZOOM  
Flip H:  
Flip V:  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
RS-232C [bps]: Selectable baud rate (transmission speed). 9600 / 19200*  
Sleep time [min]: Selectable sleep times. If no-signal condition continues for the period of selected time  
3: Right side part of the image  
will be displayed.  
(Unit: Minutes), the projector enters the stand-by mode. 15 / 30 / 60 / OFF*  
Language  
Japanese / English* / German / Spanish / Italian / French  
Information  
Language for on-screen display.  
Notes  
Input:  
Shows the terminal name selected by the VIDEO or PC button. (Y/C, VIDEO, COMP,  
PC1, PC2 or DVI)  
Has no meaning. This display currently has no meaning. (“CH.0” is usually displayed to  
indicate that it is not being used.)  
Accumulated used hours of the light-source lamp.  
• This function will not work with some signal sources  
(UXGA, etc). In this case, the DIGITAL ZOOM inhibit  
message appears for a few seconds, as shown on the left.  
To forcibly clear this message, press the EXIT button.  
• The quality of the zoomed image reduces in comparison  
with the original one.  
Switcher:  
Lamp time:  
• To return to the original size ( 1.0) and original position,  
×
press the PRESET button while “Digital zoom” is displayed  
on the screen.  
37  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
.
I Menu Transition Diagram in Video Menu Mode  
I
Quick Reference Guide for Video Menu Mode  
Main menu in Video Menu Mode  
Submenus in Video Menu Mode  
Main Menu in Video Menu Mode (While receiving video-device-related signals)  
Image adj. (Refer to page 49)  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Press 2/3to select Yes or No.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Contrast:  
Brightness:  
Color:  
Contrast of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Brightness of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Color density of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Tint of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Sharpness of the video image being projected can be adjusted. (–5 to +5, 0*)  
Resets above items to the factory set values.  
Then, press ENTER to execute.  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Image adj.  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
12  
12  
12  
12  
1
Image adj.  
Contrast  
Tint:  
Sharpness:  
All reset:  
3or  
Set up  
Brightness  
Color  
All reset?  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Color temp.  
Options  
Tint  
Yes  
No  
Tint  
Sharpness  
All reset  
EXIT  
Language  
Information  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Yes / No  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Set up 1  
5
Press ENTER to select an item.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Position:  
Video screen position and menu position can be adjusted.  
Disp. Posi. / Menu  
(Refer to page 51)  
5
Press 5// 2/3 to move the video screen/menu position.  
Position  
Menu  
Image tone can be changed. Down/Cinema*/Up (Suitable for the cinema programes)(Refer to  
Set up  
Position  
1
Position  
Gamma  
Image adj.  
Set up  
ENTER  
Gamma:  
page 52)  
3or  
ENTER  
Down  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
Tracking  
Deinterlace  
Phase  
ENTER  
Disp.Posi.  
12,12  
Menu  
Color temp.  
Options  
Cinema  
4:3  
Up  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder:  
Selectable aspect ratio, 4:3*/16:9.  
Selectable color systems, Normally, set to AUTO. (Refer to page 45)  
(This item is displayed only when inputting VIDEO or Y/C.)  
(Refer to page 52)  
Gamma  
EXIT  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
16:9  
ENTER  
ENTER  
EXI  
T
Language  
Information  
ENTER  
ENTER  
EXIT  
Screen  
HDTV  
Page  
2
AUTO*/NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/SECAM  
Page 2 Press ENTER to enter the “Set up 2” submenu  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
ENTER  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Tracking: Normally, no adjustment is required. The lateral size and display area of video image can be  
Set up  
1
Decoder  
ENT  
adjusted. (–128 to + 127)  
Deinterlace: Set when watching movies which were recorded on film.  
(Refer to page 47)  
Position  
ENTER  
Down  
ER  
AUTO  
NTSC  
[
NTSC  
]
Gamma  
Cinema  
4:3  
Up  
5
Aspect ratio  
16:9  
Phase:  
Screen:  
HDTV:  
Page 1:  
Flickering or dim picture image can be adjusted. (0 to 31) (Refer to page 47)  
Selectable screen’s aspect ratio. 4:3*/16:9 (Refer to page 46)  
NTSC4.43  
PAL  
Page  
2
ENTER  
SECAM  
Selectable HDTV format. Normally, set to 1080i, 1080i*/1035i  
Press ENTER to return to “Page 1” submenu.  
(Refer to page 46)  
Set up  
Tracking  
2
123  
12  
Color temp.  
Phase  
Screen  
HDTV  
Color temp.:  
Adjustable color temperature, Low/Middle*/High.  
Will be adjusted to correct reddish or blueish image.  
4:3  
16:9  
1080i  
1035i  
RED:  
GREEN:  
BLUE:  
Adjusts the red level. (0 to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Adjusts the green level. (0 to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Adjusts the blue level. (0 to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Reset above items to the factory set values.  
Page  
1
ENTER  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Set up  
2
*
The film function is  
Deinterlace  
Phase  
Video Film  
AUTO  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
displayed when the  
input signal is  
12  
Menu  
All-reset:  
4:3  
16:9  
1035i  
Screen  
HDTV  
Color temp.  
equivalent to NTSC  
or PAL. The tracking  
function is displayed  
for other signals.  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Color temp.  
RED  
ENTER  
3or  
ENTER  
1080i  
Yes/No  
Color temp.  
RED  
Low  
Middle  
High  
Page  
1
ENTER  
GREEN  
BLUE  
Color temp.  
Options  
123  
123  
123  
(Refer to page 54)  
Options  
GREEN  
BLUE  
Options 1  
Call reset  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
Menu display:  
Line display:  
15sec* (Menu disappears in 15 seconds.) / ON (Menu stays on.)  
5sec* (Line display such as “VIDEO”, “Y/C”, “PC1”, or “PC2” appears on top right of the screen for  
5 seconds when the VIDEO or PC button is pressed.) / OFF (Line display does not appear.)  
EXIT  
All reset  
ENTER  
E
N
Press 5/to select an item.  
T
E
R
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Color temp.  
5
Lamp time display:  
ON*:  
OFF:  
Keystone:  
Keystone:  
Menu  
Options  
E
N
Displays when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or LOC mode.  
Does not display when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or LOC mode.  
Press ENTER to enter the Keystone submenu.  
Adjust to correct the trapezoidal distortion of the projected image.  
(–80 to +120, 0*)  
All reset?  
T
Menu display  
15sec  
5sec  
ON  
ON  
Menu display  
Line display  
Image adj.  
Set up  
3or  
ENTER Line display  
E
R
OFF  
OFF  
Yes  
No  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
Color temp.  
Options  
Lamp time display  
Lamp control  
Keystone  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Lamp control  
Page  
2
ENTER  
Lamp control:  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Normal*: Used as a normal lamp.  
LPC:  
LOC:  
You can see the information.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Language  
5
Lamp brightness is automatically controlled with time.  
Lamp brightness is controlled in 7 levels (-6 to 0) irrespective of the time. This is set within the menu.  
Press ENTER to enter the “Page 2” submenu.  
Keystone  
123  
Menu  
ENTER  
3or  
ENTER  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Page 2:  
Flip H.:  
Lamp control  
English  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
Selectable baud rate (transmission speed). 9600 / 19200*  
Selectable sleep times. If no-signal condition continues for the period of  
selected time (Unite: Minutes), the projector enters the stand-by mode. 15 / 30  
/ 60 / OFF*  
Color temp.  
Options  
Deutsch  
Español  
Normal  
Flip V:  
RS-232C [bps]:  
Sleep time [min]:  
LPC  
LOC  
EXIT  
Language  
Information  
Italiano  
Français  
5
Menu  
Page 1:  
Press ENTER to return to the “Page 1” submenu.  
Page  
2
Image adj.  
Set up  
Language  
Japanese / English* / German / Spanish / Italian / French  
Information (Refer to page 56)  
Language for on-screen display.  
(Refer to page 46)  
Input  
PC1  
CH.0  
Flip  
H
OFF  
ON  
ON  
Switcher  
Source  
Flip V  
OFF  
9600  
30  
Color temp.  
Options  
NTSC  
RS-232C [bps]  
Sleep time [min]  
19200  
60 OFF  
15  
Input:  
Switcher:  
Shows the terminal name selected by the VIDEO or PC button. (Y/C, VIDEO, COMP, PC1, PC2 or DVI)  
Has no meaning. This display currently has no meaning, (“CH.0” is usually displayed to indicate  
that it is not being used.)  
Language  
Information  
Lamp time  
123  
h
Page  
1
ENTER  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Note  
Source:  
Shows the projected image’s type of video signal.  
Lamp time:  
Accumulated used hours of the light-source lamp.  
• The display languages of the menus are set to “English” when the projector is  
bought. The display language can be selected from the following 6 languages:  
* : Factory set value.  
(Japanese)”, “English (English)”, “Deutsch (German)”, “Español (Spanish)”,  
“Italiano (Italian)” and “Français (French)”. (Refer to page 46.)  
The language settings in the section are explained in “English”.  
40  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Quick Reference Guide for PC Menu Mode  
I Menu Transition Diagram in PC Menu Mode  
I
Main Menu in PC Menu Mode (While receiving computer-related signals)  
Main menu in PC Menu Mode  
Submenus in PC Menu Mode  
Image adj. (Refer to page 49)  
Contrast:  
Contrast of the picture image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Press 2/3to select Yes or No.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Then, press ENTER to execute.  
Brightness:  
Sharpness:  
All reset:  
Brightness of the picture image being projected can be adjusted. (–30 to +30, 0*)  
Adjust the outline of letters etc. (1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5, 3*)  
Resets above items to the factory set values.  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Image adj.  
Contrast  
3or  
Image adj.  
Set up  
EXIT  
All reset?  
Brightness  
Yes / No  
ENTER  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Color temp.  
Options  
Contrast  
12  
12  
Set up  
ENTER  
Yes  
No  
Brightness  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Tracking:  
The lateral size and display area of picture image can be adjusted. (–128 to +127)  
(Refer to page 47)  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
1
2
3
4
5
ENTER  
Phase:  
Position:  
Flickering or dim picture image can be adjusted. (0 to 31) (Refer to page 47)  
Video screen position and menu position can be adjusted. (Refer to page 51)  
5
Press ENTER to select an item.  
Press 5// 2/3 to move the  
video screen/menu position.  
5
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Disp. Posi. / Menu  
Resize:  
The relationship between the number of pixels (resolution) and the screen can be  
Menu  
Position  
Set up  
1
selected. (Refer to page 53)  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Tracking  
Phase  
3or  
ENTER  
Tracking  
123  
12  
“1:1”:  
Panel:  
Aspect*:  
Picture image is projected with its original size.  
ENTER  
Disp.Posi.  
12,12  
Menu  
Color temp.  
Options  
Phase  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
Picture image is enlarged to the full size.  
Picture image is enlarged while maintaining the original aspect ratio.  
Selectable clamp position. Normally, set to “BP”. ST / BP*  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
EXIT  
1:1  
ST  
Panel  
Aspect  
BP  
Clamp:  
Color temp.  
Color temp.:  
Adjustable color temperature, Low/Middle* /High.  
Will be adjusted to correct reddish or blueish image.  
Set up  
1
5
RED:  
GREEN:  
BLUE:  
Adjusts the red level. (o to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Adjusts the green level. (o to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Adjusts the blue level. (o to 255, the adjustable range varies depending on signals)  
Reset above items to the factory set values.  
Position  
Resize  
ENTER  
1:1  
Press 2/3to select Yes or No.  
Panel  
Aspect  
Then, press ENTER to execute.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Color temp.  
Menu  
All-reset:  
Color temp.  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Yes/No  
EXIT  
3or  
ENTER  
Color temp.  
RED  
Color temp.  
RED  
Low  
Middle  
High  
All reset?  
Options (Refer to page 54)  
Options 1  
Color temp.  
Options  
123  
123  
123  
Yes  
No  
GREEN  
BLUE  
GREEN  
BLUE  
Menu display:  
Line display:  
15sec* (Menu disappears in 15 seconds.) / ON (Menu stays on.)  
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
All reset  
5sec* (Line display such as “PC1” or “PC2” appears on top right of the screen for 5  
seconds when the VIDEO or PC button is pressed.) / OFF (Line display does not  
appear.)  
All reset  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Press 5  
Press 2  
/
to select an item.  
3to set or adjust the value.  
5
Lamp time display:  
ON*:  
/
Keystone  
0
Menu  
Displays when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or LOC mode.  
Does not display when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or LOC  
mode.  
Options  
ENTER  
Menu display  
Line display  
15sec  
5sec  
ON  
ON  
Menu display  
Line display  
Image adj.  
Set up  
3or  
ENTER  
OFF:  
OFF  
OFF  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
Color temp.  
Options  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
Keystone:  
Press ENTER to enter the Keystone submenu.  
Adjust to correct the trapezoidal distortion of the projected image.  
(–80 to +128, 0*)  
EXIT  
Lamp control  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Keystone:  
EXIT  
Language  
Information  
Lamp control  
Page  
2
ENTER  
Lamp control:  
ENTER  
Normal*: Used as a normal lamp.  
Press 5/to  
select an item.  
Language  
5
ENTER  
LPC:  
LOC:  
Lamp brightness is aLutomatically controlled with time.  
Lamp brightness is controlled in 7 levels (-6 to 0) irrespective of the time. This is set within  
the menu.  
Menu  
Lamp control  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Normal  
LPC  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
Page 2:  
Press ENTER to enter the “Page 2” submenu.  
Color temp.  
Options  
LOC  
Flip H:  
Flip V:  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
OFF* / ON (Select for upside-down hanging on the ceiling.)  
Language  
Information  
RS-232C [bps]:  
Sleep time [min]:  
Selectable baud rate (transmission speed). 9600 / 19200*  
Selectable sleep times. If no-signal condition continues for the  
period of selected time (Unite: Minutes), the projector enters the  
stand-by mode. 15 / 30 / 60 / OFF*  
Page  
2
5
Flip  
H
OFF  
OFF  
9600  
30  
ON  
Flip V  
ON  
Menu  
Page 1:  
Press ENTER to return to the “Page 1” submenu.  
RS-232C [bps]  
Sleep time [min]  
19200  
Language  
Language for on-screen display. (Refer to page 46)  
Japanese / English* / German / Spanish / Italian / French  
Information (Refer to page 56)  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Input  
PC 1  
CH.0  
15  
60 OFF  
Switcher  
Page  
1
ENTER  
Color temp.  
Options  
Resolution  
Frequency  
NTSC  
H
79.9 kHz  
75 Hz  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
Input:  
Shows the terminal name selected by the PC button. (PC1 or PC2)  
This display currently has no meaning. (“CH.0” is usually displayed to indicate that it is not being used.)  
Shows the resolution of the input signal being received. (Horizontal × Vertical)  
It may not be displayed correctly with some input signals.  
Frequency V  
Lamp time  
Language  
Information  
123  
h
Switcher:  
Resolution:  
You can see the information.  
Note  
Frequency H:  
Frequency V:  
Lamp time:  
Shows the horizontal frequency of the input signal being received. ( kHz)  
Shows the vertical frequency of the input signal being received. ( Hz)  
Accumulated used hours of the light-source lamp.  
• The display languages of the menus are set to “English” when the projector is  
bought. The display language can be selected from the following 6 languages:  
(Japanese)”, “English (English)”, “Deutsch (German)”, “Español  
* : Factory set value.  
(Spanish)”, “Italiano (Italian)” and “Français (French)”. (Refer to page 46.)  
The language settings in the section are explained in “English”.  
41  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                                                       
                                                                                            
2
Press the cursor button 5or ∞  
select an item in the main menu.  
                                                 
to  
When an item which has the “ENTER” message has been  
selected in step 4, press the ENTER button to move to the  
next submenu.  
I Video menu mode  
12  
3
Press the cursor button 3  
ENTER button to enter the submenu.  
The submenu corresponding to the item selected in step  
2 is displayed on the screen.  
* When you selected “Information” in step 2, no  
submenu is available.  
                                             
or the  
                                                                                            
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Basic Menu Operation (Cont.)  
Basic Menu Operation  
I
Basic Button Functions in the Menu Mode  
When the MENU button is pressed, the projector enters Video or PC menu mode by responding to the input signal being  
received.  
Button  
MENU  
Function  
Enters the main menu or exits the menu mode.  
Selects an item in the menu. Pressing or 5will scroll the item in the menu.  
Sets or adjusts the value.  
Video menu mode:  
Enters this mode when video-device-related signals are  
input from the following devices.  
• Video devices connected to the VIDEO IN (Y/C, VIDEO  
and COMP) terminals.  
4
Press the cursor button 5or to  
select an item in the submenu.  
When a “Language” has been selected in step 2, press  
to set the language.  
Cursor button 5/∞  
Cursor button 2/3  
PRESET  
If pressed while the keystone setting submenu is displayed, the value is set to “0”.  
Returns to the previous menu.  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
PC menu mode:  
EXIT  
Enters this mode when computer-related signals are input  
from the following devices.  
ENTER  
Used to enter the submenu from the main menu.  
Used to enter the next submenu if “ENTER” is displayed in the selected item.  
• A computer connected to the PC 1 terminal.  
• A computer connected to the PC 2 terminal, which outputs  
analog RGB, V, H/Cs signals.  
I Remote control unit  
I Projector  
• A computer connected to the DVI terminal.  
5
Press the cursor button 2  
or adjust the value.  
Remote control unit  
or 3 to set  
STAND BY  
LAMP  
TEMP  
1
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu is displayed on the screen.  
QUICK  
ALIGN.  
OPERATE  
OPERATE  
HIDE  
HIDE  
W
Projector  
SCREEN FREEZE COMP  
Remote control unit  
MENU  
Projector  
VIDEO  
Y/C  
S
PC  
PC1  
PC2  
T
DVI  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
T
ZOOM  
VIDEO  
MENU  
DIGITAL  
ZOOM  
FOCUS  
MENU  
KEYSTONE  
W
W
PRESET  
PRESET button  
EXIT button  
MENU button  
ENTER button  
PRESET  
button  
MENU  
button  
EXIT  
ENTER  
EXIT  
button  
ENTER  
button  
Cursor buttons  
5// 2/3  
EXIT  
ENTER  
RM-M160 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT  
Cursor buttons  
5// 2/3  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
• All reset  
• Position  
• Decoder  
• Keystone  
• Page 1  
(Refer to page 49)  
(Refer to page 51)  
(Refer to page 45)  
(Refer to page 54)  
(Refer to page 54)  
(Refer to page 54)  
Video submenu  
Video main menu  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Contrast  
• Page 2  
Image adj.  
Set up  
3or  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
ENTER  
Brightness  
Color  
12  
To exit the main menu:  
Color temp.  
Options  
12  
• While the main menu is displayed, press the MENU button.  
The main menu disappears and the original picture image  
resumes.  
Tint  
Tint  
12  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Language  
Information  
Sharpness  
All reset  
1
EXIT  
ENTER  
To exit the submenu:  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
• While the submenu is displayed, press the EXIT button.  
The menu returns to the previous menu.  
• To exit the menu mode directly, press the MENU button.  
The submenu disappears and the original video image is  
restored.  
I PC menu mode  
Remote control unit  
Projector  
PC submenu  
PC main menu  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Contrast  
3or  
Image adj.  
Set up  
Brightness  
ENTER  
Contrast  
12  
12  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Color temp.  
Options  
Brightness  
Sharpness  
All reset  
1
2
3
4
5
Language  
Information  
EXIT  
ENTER  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 5/to select an item.  
Press 2/3to set or adjust the value.  
44  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Language” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Language” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                                   
, and press 3or the ENTER button.  
                                                                                                                                                                               
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Set up 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                               
, and press 3 or the ENTER button.  
                                                                            
Select “Decoder” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Decoder” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                 
, and press the ENTER button.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
Japanese  
English  
German  
Spanish  
Italian  
3
4
Set the language with the cursor button 5or .  
                                                                                                                                                                 
4
5
Set the color system with the cursor button 5or .  
                                                                    
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Set up 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                                
, and press 3  
                                                                                                                                                                            
or the ENTER button.  
or the ENTER button.  
Select “Set up 2” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Set up 2” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                                 
, and press 3  
                                                                                                                                                                              
4
5
Select “Screen” or “HDTV” with the cursor button 5or .  
                                                                                                                                                                           
Adjust the Screen aspect ratio or HDTV format with the cursor button 2  
To adjust multiple items, repeat 4 and 5.  
                                                                                                                                                                                        
or 3.  
                                                                                                                                                                                             
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Changing the Color System (Video Menu Mode Only)  
Changing the Language Display  
This function is available only in Video menu mode.  
The menu is only displayed when there is a signal for the AV IN (Y/C, VIDEO and COMP) terminal.  
The on-screen language is set to “English” when shipped from the factory. When you want to change to another language, set  
it as follows.  
Normally, use the color system in AUTO. If operation in AUTO is unstable, such as color not being shown, set to a dedicated  
color system in accordance with the color system of the video signal being input.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
1
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Language  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
English  
Deutsch  
Español  
Italiano  
Français  
Video submenus  
French  
Decoder  
Set up 1  
Position  
AUTO  
NTSC  
[
NTSC  
]
ENTER  
Down  
Gamma  
Cinema  
4:3  
Up  
NTSC4.43  
PAL  
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
Page 2  
16:9  
ENTER  
EXIT  
ENTER  
ENTER  
SECAM  
Memo  
About language display  
Some words in the menu and messages such as “Quick Alignment”, “Keystone”, “VIDEO” and “NTSC” are shown only in  
English.  
AUTO:  
Normally, set to “AUTO”. (Factory set value)  
The color system of a video signal being input is automatically identified and displayed in [ ].  
In [ ], B/W (Black & White), NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL or SECAM will be displayed. (It is not always displayed.)  
For example, AUTO [ NTSC ] shows that the NTSC signal is being received.  
Dedicated to NTSC.  
Changing the Screen aspect ratio/HDTV format (Video Menu  
Mode Only)  
NTSC:  
NTSC4.43:Dedicated to NTSC4.43.  
PAL: Dedicated to PAL.  
SECAM: Dedicated to SECAM.  
1
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Adjustment item  
Screen  
HDTV  
Button  
Adjustment content  
Select according to the aspect ratio of the screen used.  
2or 3  
4:3  
16:9  
Set the number of effective scanning lines. Normally, select 1080i.  
2or 3  
1080i: 1035i:  
6
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
45  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
The “Set up 1” (video mode) or “Set up” submenu appears on the screen.  
In video mode: Select set up 2 with the cursor or 5, and press ENTER button.  
The “Set up 2” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                               
, and press 3  
                                                                            
or the ENTER button.  
3
4
Select “Tracking” or “Phase” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
Adjust the tracking or phase with the cursor 2 or 3  
                                                                            
.
                                                                
                                                                     
.
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Set up for Watching Image Software (Video Menu Mode Only)  
Adjusting Tracking/Phase  
This unit has a function which allows you to project movies, which were recorded on film, in the best possible conditions.  
(Function to convert 2-3 pull-down interlace scans to progressive scans)  
Normally, tracking and phase adjustments are automatically carried out when a video signal is input to the projector for the  
first time, or when the QUICK ALIGN. button on the remote control is pressed.  
However, you can manually adjust the tracking and phase on the menu.  
Normally use set to AUTO.  
If a wide stripe appears on the screen, adjust the lateral size of the picture image and the display area (tracking adjustment)  
so the stripe disappears.  
Also, if text projected on the screen appears flickers or appears dim, adjust phase adjustment so it becomes clear.  
1
2
3
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5or , and press 3or the ENTER button.  
The “Set up 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Select “Set up 2” with the cursor button 5or , and press 3or the ENTER button.  
The “Set up 2” submenu appears on the screen.  
4
5
Select “Deinterlace” with the cursor button 5or .  
Video submenu  
PC submenu  
Select the Deinterlace function mode with the cursor button 2or 3.  
Video: When watching images recorded with a video camera  
Film: When watching images recorded on film  
AUTO: The setting is changed automatically  
Set up  
Position  
1
Set up  
Tracking  
2
Set up  
Tracking  
ENTER  
Down  
123  
12  
123  
12  
Gamma  
Cinema Up  
4:3 16:9  
Phase  
Screen  
HDTV  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
4:3  
16:9  
Phase  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
ENTER  
ENTER  
1030i  
1035i  
6
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
ENTER  
Page  
2
Page  
1
ENTER  
1:1  
ST  
Panel  
Aspect  
BP  
Decoder is only displayed when there is a signal for the AV  
IN terminal.  
Note  
• Operates when the signal is an NTSC or PAL interlace signal. Does not operate for other signals. (The menu is not  
displayed when other signals are inputted.)  
Adjust the tracking and phase of the picture image being projected. To adjust the phase, first check for correct tracking  
adjustment.  
*To adjust multiple items, repeat 3 and 4.  
Adjustment item  
Tracking  
Phase  
Button  
2or 3  
2or 3  
Adjustment content  
The picture image shrinks laterally (right-to-left) or extends laterally (left-to-  
right). (–128 +127)  
Set to a position where text appears clear. (0 31)  
5
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Note  
• A dim image could be caused by insufficient adjustment of brightness and contrast. Before adjusting phase, make sure that  
brightness and contrast are correctly adjusted. To adjust them, refer to “Adjusting Picture Quality” on page 49.  
48  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Image adj.” with the cursor button 5  
The “Image adj.” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                              
or ∞  
                                                                  
, and press 3or the ENTER button.  
                                                                               
3
4
Select the item to be adjusted with the cursor button 5  
*“Color” and “Tint” are shown in Video submenu only.  
                                                                        
or ∞  
                                                                             
.
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Make adjustment with the cursor 2  
                                                     
or 3  
                                                          
.
Select “Color temp.” with the cursor button 5  
                                                                                                                                                                
or ∞  
or ∞  
                                                                                                                                                                     
, and press 3 or the ENTER  
                                                                                                                                                                                 
3
4
Select “Color temp.” with the cursor button 5  
                                                                                                                                                                
                                                                                                                                                                     
.
Adjust the color temperature with the cursor button 2  
                                                                                                                                                                        
or 3.  
                                                                                                                                                                            
5
6
Select “RED” or “GREEN” or “BLUE” with the cursor button 5or .  
                                                                                                                                                                                    
Fine adjust the color temperature with the cursor button 2  
To adjust multiple items, repeat 5 and 6.  
                                                                                                                                                                            
or 3.  
                                                                                                                                                                                 
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
.
Adjusting Picture Quality  
Image adj.  
In the “Image adj.” submenu, adjust brightness, contrast, sharpness, etc. to obtain the desired picture quality. Note that the  
adjustment items differ in Video menu mode and PC menu mode.  
All reset?  
Yes  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
No  
Video submenu  
PC submenu  
5
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Image adj.  
Image adj.  
Contrast  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
12  
12  
12  
12  
1
12  
12  
Memo  
Brightness  
Sharpness  
All reset  
In some adjustments, the level bar changes according to the set value. (The setting value is also displayed at the left of the  
level bar.)  
1
2
3
4
5
Tint  
ENTER  
Sharpness  
All reset  
Adjusting Color temperature  
ENTER  
*To adjust multiple items, repeat 3 and 4.  
button.  
The “Color temp.” submenu appears on the screen.  
Adjustment item  
Contrast  
Button  
2or 3  
2or 3  
Adjustment content  
Gets lower/higher. (–30 0* +30)  
Gets darker/brighter. (–30 0* +30)  
Brightness  
Color  
Low:  
Middle:  
High:  
Color temperature decreases (image becoming reddish).  
Results in middle color temperature. (Factory set position).  
Color temperature increases (image becoming blueish).  
Gets softer/deeper. (–30 0* +30)  
2or 3  
2or 3  
(Video menu mode only)  
Gets reddish/greenish. (–30 0* +30)  
(Video menu mode only)  
Tint  
Gets softer/sharper.  
• Video menu mode: (–5 0* +5)  
• PC menu mode: (1 3* 5)  
Sharpness  
2or 3  
Adjustment item  
RED  
Button  
2or 3  
2or 3  
2or 3  
Adjustment content  
Adjusts the red level. (0 to 255)  
Note  
• When in the PC menu mode, if the resize function in the PC submenu is set to  
“1:1”, the image quality will not change even if the value is changed.  
GREEN  
BLUE  
Adjusts the green level. (0 to 255)  
Adjusts the blue level. (0 to 255)  
Resets above items to the factory set values. How to operate is mentioned below  
(next page).  
All reset  
ENTER  
* : Factory set value  
I To perform All Reset  
• In the Color temp. submenu, select “All reset” with the cursor button 5or , and press the ENTER button. Then, the “All  
reset” submenu appears on the screen.  
I To perform All Reset  
• Press the cursor button 2to select “Yes”, and then press the ENTER button.  
• All items in the Color temp. submenu are reset to the factory set values and the menu returns to the previous one.  
To exit the “All reset” submenu without performing All reset, select “No” with the cursor button 3and, press the ENTER  
button  
• In the Image adj. submenu, select “All reset” with the cursor button 5or , and press the ENTER button. Then, the “All  
reset” submenu appears on the screen.  
• Press the cursor button 2to select “Yes”, and then press the ENTER button.  
• All items in the “Image adj.” submenu are reset to the factory set values and the menu returns to the previous one.  
To exit the “All reset” submenu without performing All reset, select “No” with the cursor button 3and, press the ENTER  
button.  
7
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
(To be continued on the next page)  
49  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5  
The “Set up 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                           
or ∞  
                                                                                                                                                                
, and press 3 or the ENTER button.  
                                                                                                                                                                            
Select “Set up” with the cursor button 5  
The “Set up 1” or “Set up” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                          
or ∞  
                                                               
, and press 3  
                                                                            
or the ENTER button.  
3
4
Select “Gamma” or “Aspect ratio” with the cursor button 5  
                                                                                                                                                                             
or .  
                                                                                                                                                                                  
3
Select “Position” with the cursor button 5  
The “Position” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                            
or ∞  
                                                                 
, and press the ENTER button.  
Adjust the image tone or aspect ratio with the cursor 2  
                                                                                                                                                                         
or 3.  
                                                                                                                                                                              
Press the cursor button 5  
                                             
, ∞  
                                                
, 2  
                                                  
or 3 to move the video screen (display) or the  
                                                       
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Changing the Image Gamma/Aspect Ratio (Video Menu Mode Only)  
The image Gamma (Down, Cinema or Up) and the aspect ratio (4:3 or 16:9) are selectable in Video menu mode.  
Adjusting the Video Screen/Menu Position  
The position of the video screen and the menu on the video screen can be adjusted. You can finely adjust the video screen  
position. The menu will move widely on the video screen.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Video submenu  
Video submenu (“Set up 1” submenu)  
PC submenu (Set up submenu)  
Set up 1  
Set up  
Set up 1  
Position  
Gamma  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
Page 2  
ENTER  
Down  
Tracking  
Phase  
123  
12  
Position  
Gamma  
Aspect ratio  
Decoder  
Page 2  
ENTER  
Down Cinema  
4:3  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Cinema  
4:3  
Up  
Up  
16:9  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
ENTER  
16:9  
ENTER  
ENTER  
1:1  
ST  
Panel  
Aspect  
BP  
Decoder is only displayed when there is a signal for the Video IN terminal.  
Decoder is only displayed when there is a  
signal for the AV IN terminal.  
*To adjust multiple items, repeat 3 and 4.  
Position  
Adjustment item  
Button  
Adjustment content  
The image Gamma projected on the screen can be changed.  
Down: Suitable for projegctin the video programs.  
Cinema* : Normally use in this mode.  
Up : Suitable for projecting the cinema programs.  
Gamma  
2or 3  
Disp.Posi.  
Menu  
12,12  
ENTER  
Horizontal position  
Sets the vertical-to-horizontal ratio (4:3 or 16:9) of the video image projected.  
“4:3*” : The aspect ratio of the projected image becomes 4:3. Set it to 4:3 for video  
of NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL, SECAM.  
Aspect ratio  
2or 3  
“16:9” : The aspect ratio of projected image becomes 16:9. Set it to 16:9 for Hi-  
Vision devices (W-VHS VCR, etc.).  
Vertical position  
* : Factory set value  
4
5
Press the ENTER button to select “Disp.Posi.” or “Menu”.  
Disp.Posi. (Display Position):The video screen position (display position) can be adjusted.  
Menu:The menu position can be adjusted.  
5
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
menu.  
*Repeat 4 and 5 to move both video screen (display) and menu positions.  
Adjustment item  
Button  
2or 3  
5or ∞  
2or 3  
5or ∞  
Adjustment content  
The video screen moves to the left or right. (–30 +30)  
The video screen moves up or down. (–30 +30)  
The menu moves to the left or right. (Left, center*, right)  
The menu moves up or down. (Top, center*, bottom)  
Disp.Posi. - H  
Disp.Posi. - V  
Menu - H  
Menu - V  
* : Factory set value  
6
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
52  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
                                                                
or ∞  
                                                                     
, and press 3 or the ENTER  
                                                                                  
Select “Options” with the cursor button 5  
The “Options 1” submenu appears on the screen.  
                                                                                                                                                            
or ∞  
                                                                                                                                                                 
, and press 3 or the ENTER button.  
                                                                                                                                                                              
3
4
Select the item to be adjusted with the cursor button 5  
Make adjustment with the cursor 2 or 3  
• While the keystone item is selected, press the ENTER button to display the “Keystone” submenu.  
• To enter the “Page 2” submenu, select “Page 2” with the cursor button 5or , and press the ENTER button.  
• To return to the “Page 1” submenu from the “Page 2” submenu, select “Page 1” with the cursor button 5or , and press  
the ENTER button.  
                                                                                                                                                                        
or .  
                                                                                                                                                                             
                                                                
                                                                     
.
                                                                                                                                                      
                                                                                                                                                           
.
                                                                                      
                                                                                           
.
5
                                                                
or ∞  
                                                                     
, and press 3 or the ENTER  
                                                                                  
5
                                                                
or ∞  
Choose “ST” or “BP” with the cursor  
button 2or 3  
                                                                     
.
                                                                       
                                                                            
.
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Changing the Image Size - Resize Function (PC Menu Mode Only)  
Setting and Adjusting Other Functions (OPTIONS)  
The picture image projected can be selectable with the  
Various functions are provided as shown in the “Options 1” and “Options 2” submenus.  
You can set or adjust each function, as required.  
1
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
Resize function which is available only in PC menu mode.  
You can choose the video image size projected from the  
following: (Factory setting is “Aspect”.)  
2
Select “Set up” with the cursor button  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
“1:1”: The image is displayed at the input resolution. The  
picture image projected is not enlarged even if its  
number of pixels (resolution) is smaller than that of  
the projector’s D-ILA element (1365 pixels × 1024  
pixels).  
button.  
The “Set up” submenu appears on the screen.  
PC submenu  
Options 1  
Resize: 1:1  
Set up  
Tracking  
Menu display  
Line display  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
15sec  
5sec  
ON  
ON  
123  
12  
OFF  
OFF  
Full size (1365 × 1024)  
Phase  
Position  
Resize  
Clamp  
ENTER  
ENTER  
ENTER  
1:1  
ST  
Panel  
Aspect  
BP  
Lamp control  
Page 2  
ENTER  
Image not enlarged  
3
4
5
Select “Resize” with the cursor button  
5 or ∞  
Panel: The picture image projected is virtually enlarged to  
the full size (1365 pixels × 1024 pixels). The  
horizontal and vertical enlargement ratio will differ  
depending on the original image and the image will  
be deformed.  
Choose “1:1”, “Panel”, or “Aspect”  
with the cursor button 2 or 3  
Resize: Panel  
Press the EXIT button to return to the  
previous menu or press the MENU  
button to exit the menu mode.  
Keystone  
123  
Image enlarged  
to the full size  
(1365 × 1024)  
Changing the Clamp pulse position  
(PC Menu Mode Only)  
When the image is too dark or bright, or when the image is  
unstable, switching the position may improve the image  
quality. Normally, set to “BP”.  
Options  
ENTER  
Image not enlarged  
(Original image)  
Lamp control  
Menu display  
Line display  
Lamp time display  
Keystone  
15sec  
5sec  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
Normal  
Aspect:While maintaining the original aspect ratio, the video  
image projected is virtually enlarged until either the  
horizontal or vertical side reaches the full size (1365  
pixels × 1024 pixels).  
LPC  
LOC  
ENTER  
ENTER  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
ENTER  
Lamp control  
Page 2  
Resize: Aspect  
ENTER  
Image enlarged to the aspect size.  
(Example: aspect ratio is 16:9)  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Select “Set up” with the cursor button  
Full size (1365 × 1024)  
button.  
ENTER  
Page 2  
The “Set up” submenu appears on the screen.  
Flip H  
OFF  
OFF  
9600  
30  
ON  
ON  
3
4
5
Select “Clamp” with the cursor button  
Flip V  
RS-232C [bps]  
Sleep time [min]  
Page 1  
19200  
60 OFF  
Image not enlarged (original image)  
(Example: aspect ratio is 16:9)  
15  
ENTER  
Image enlarged to the aspect size.  
(Example: aspect ratio is 5:4)  
Press the EXIT button to return to the  
previous menu or press the MENU  
button to exit the menu mode.  
*To adjust multiple items, repeat 3 to 4.  
*To reset the keystone (trapezoidal distortion of the picture image) to the original setting, press the PRESET button when  
the “Keystone” submenu appears on the screen.  
Full size (1365 × 1024)  
ST: Sync Tip BP: Back Porch  
Image not enlarged  
(original image)  
(Example: aspect ratio is 5:4)  
53  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select “Information” with the cursor button 5  
The “Information” will be displayed in the main menu.  
*No submenu can be selected.  
                                                                                                                                                                
or .  
                                                                                                                                                                     
Menu Operations  
Menu Operations  
Getting Information  
You can get information on the input signal, accumulated used hours of light-source lamp, etc.  
Adjustment item  
Button  
Adjustment content  
Sets whether to clear the menu display automatically or not.  
15sec* : Clears the display automatically in about 15 seconds.  
Menu display  
2or 3  
1
2
Press the MENU button.  
The main menu appears on the screen.  
ON  
: Does not automatically clear the menu display.  
Sets whether to show the line display (Y/C, VIDEO, COMP, PC1, PC2 or DVI) on top  
right of the screen or not when the VIDEO or PC button is pressed.  
5sec* : Shows the line display for about 5 seconds.  
Line display  
2or 3  
OFF : Does not show the line display.  
Displays the lamp use time.  
ON* : Displays when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the LPC or  
Video main menu  
PC main menu  
Lamp time display  
2or 3  
LOC mode.  
OFF : Does not display when the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours when set in the  
LPC or LOC mode.3  
Menu  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Setting  
Image adj.  
Setting  
Input  
VIDEO  
CH.0  
Input  
PC 1  
CH.0  
Press the ENTER button to enter the keystone submenu.  
In the keystone submenu, press 2or 3to correct trapezoidal distortion of the  
projected image. (–80 0* +128)  
To reset the keystone (trapezoidal distortion of the picture image) to the original  
setting (factory set value: 0), press the PRESET button when the “Keystone”  
submenu appears on the screen.  
Switcher  
Source  
Switcher  
Color temp.  
Options  
Color temp.  
Options  
NTSC  
Resolution 1280 1024  
Keystone  
ENTER  
Frequency H  
Frequency V  
Lamp time  
79.9 kHz  
75 Hz  
Language  
Information  
Language  
Information  
Lamp time  
123 h  
123  
h
To exit the keystone submenu, press the EXIT button.  
Press ENTER to enter the lamp control submenu.  
Normal* : Used as a normal lamp.  
LPC  
: Automatically controls the power used by the lamp and increases it in  
steps. When this mode is used, the brightness starts at approximately  
70%. The decrease in brightness is slower than in “Normal” mode and this  
mode is best suited when using the projector continuously for long periods  
of time.  
Input:  
Switcher:  
Shows the terminal name selected by the VIDEO or PC button. (Y/C, VIDEO or COMP, or PC1, PC2 or DVI)  
This display currently has no meaning. This is reserved for future use. (“CH.0” is usually displayed to  
indicate that it is not being used.)  
Shows the projected image’s type of video signal. (Video menu mode)  
Shows the resolution of the video signal being received. (PC menu mode)  
It may not be displayed correctly with some input signals.  
Shows the horizontal frequency of the video signal being received. (PC menu mode)  
Shows the vertical frequency of the video signal being received. (PC menu mode)  
Accumulated used hours of the light-source lamp.  
Source:  
Resolution:  
Lamp control  
ENTER  
* “Lamp replacement” appears on the screen when the lamp use time  
exceeds 2000 hours.  
Frequency H:  
Frequency V:  
Lamp time:  
LOC  
: The brightness can be set in seven levels (-6 to 0). Since the brightness  
can be set in steps, this is the mode best suited for adjusting multiple  
screens. This setting can also be changed while the projector is being  
used. To change the setting, choose LOC with the 5/cursors and  
choose the level with the 2/3cursors.  
3
Press the MENU button to exit the menu mode.  
Reverses image right-to-left.  
Flip H  
2or 3  
2or 3  
OFF* : For the front method.  
ON : For upside-down hanging from the ceiling.  
Inverses image upside-down.  
OFF* : For normal setup.  
Flip V  
ON : For upside-down hanging from the ceiling.  
Sets the baud rate for transmission.  
RS-232C [bps]  
2or 3  
2or 3  
9600  
: 9600 bps  
19200* : 19200 bps  
Sets the length of sleep time which automatically brings the projector into stand-by  
state. You can select one of the sleep times: 15, 30, 60 and 0 (OFF*) minutes.  
Sleep time [min]  
* Factory set value  
5
Press the EXIT button to return to the previous menu or press the MENU button to  
exit the menu mode.  
Note  
• Refer to “Removing the Trapezoidal Distortion of the Image” on page 35 for more details about adjusting the keystone.  
56  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Fuse  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
A fuse is used to protect the power source of the projector. If the fuse is blown, replace it. When the power switch is turned on  
but no power is supplied to the projector, check the fuse. If there are any unclear points, contact the dealer where you  
purchased your projector, or consult the Service center.  
I Light-source lamp and lamp use time  
The light-source lamp has a service life of approximately 1000 hours.  
[Average lamp life: 1000 hours (brightness half-life)]  
When the light-source lamp approaches the end of its service life, degradation progresses rapidly. In NORMAL MODE,  
arrange for a new lamp (lamp unit) or replace the lamp after 900 hours. Depending on the usage conditions, the replacement  
time may be shorter.  
(In LOC and LPC modes, the brightness of the lamp is electrically controlled and the replacement time is extended. Arrange  
for a new lamp (lamp unit) or replace the lamp after 1900 hours. Depending on the usage conditions, the replacement time  
may be shorter.)  
CAUTION  
When replacing the fuse, use the same rating and type (T6.3A H 250 V). Otherwise, a fire may occur and/or the projector  
may be damaged.  
1
Turn off the main power switch and  
disconnect the power cord from both  
R
E
T
N
E
O
E
D
I
U N  
V
E
M
C
P
E P A C  
S
E
E
T
A R  
E P  
O
E
T
E S E  
K
R
P
P
M
E
T
E
D
I
H
N
O
T
S Y E  
P
M
A
L
N
W
O
D
P
U
If, even after adjusting the brightness or color, the video image is dark or the color is not correct, replace the lamp early.  
The lamp use time can be checked. Look at the “Lamp time” which is displayed with the “Information” option in the menu.  
(Refer to page 40, 42.)  
the projector and the wall outlet.  
In stand-by state (the STAND BY indicator lights on),  
place the MAIN POWER switch of OFF [ ] position.  
Contact the store from where you purchased the projector or the JVC service center for details about purchasing  
replacement lamps.  
Replacement lamp (lamp unit) part number: BHL 5001-SU  
2
Loosen the fuse holder to remove it.  
To loosen the fuse holder, use a Flat-end screwdriver.  
The LAMP indicator and the message on the screen warn you that replacement of the lamp is required, as follows:  
I Projecting after the lamp has been used for more than 900 hours (NORMAL MODE)  
Accumulated used hours  
of the light-source lamp  
When the lamp use time reaches 900 hours:  
900 hours  
The LAMP indicator lights on the projector.  
When starting to project after 900 hours has been exceeded:  
“Lamp replacement” appears on the screen.  
* The message will disappear when any button is pressed.  
When the lamp use time exceeds 1000 hours:  
The LAMP indicator blinks on the projector.  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Fuse holder  
Flat-end screwdriver  
“Lamp replacement” appears on the screen and the word “Warning”  
blinks.  
3
4
Remove the fuse from the fuse holder  
you just removed.  
1000 hours  
Fuse (T6.3A H 250 V)  
* To cancel this message, press the EXIT button.  
However, the same message will appear every hour.  
* If the projector is put in stand-by mode or turned off after the lamp has  
been used for more than 1000 hours (but less than 2010 hours), it can  
not be turned back on again unless the light-source lamp is replaced  
with a new one.  
Install the new fuse (not supplied) into  
the fuse holder.  
Warning  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Fuse holder  
Replace with a new lamp (lamp unit) and reset the lamp time. (Refer  
to page 62.)  
When the lamp use time reaches 1010 hours:  
The projector is forcibly turned off.  
The LAMP and OPERATE indicators blinks on the projector.  
* The projector can not be turned on unless the lamp (lamp unit) is  
replaced with a new one and the lamp time is reset. (Refer to  
page 62.)  
5
Reinstall the fuse holder into the  
projector.  
To reinstall the fuse holder, use a Flat-end screwdriver.  
Fuse (T6.3A H 250 V)  
1010 hours  
Fuse holder  
Note  
• If the projector is not put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can be used until 2010 hours is reached.  
57  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
I Be sure that the power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.  
I Projecting after the lamp has been used for more than 1000 hours (LIGHT OUTPUT  
CONTROL MODE) (LAMP POWER CONTROL MODE)  
1
Remove the lamp-replacement opening  
cover by loosening screws.  
Loosen the two screws with a flat-end screwdriver.  
Accumulated used hours  
of the light-source lamp  
When the lamp use time reaches 1000 hours:  
Screw  
Note  
1000 hours  
1900 hours  
2000 hours  
2010 hours  
“1000h” and “Lamp replacement” appear on the screen.  
* The messages will disappear when any button is pressed.  
* The time after which the display appears can be set with the OSD  
menu.  
• The screws are fitted so that they do not come off the lamp-  
replacement opening cover.  
1000  
h
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
When the lamp use time exceeds 1900 hours:  
The LAMP indicator blinks on the projector.  
“Lamp replacement” appears on the screen.  
* To cancel this message, press the EXIT button or display another  
menu.  
Every time the projector is turned on, the message appears.  
When the lamp use time exceeds 2000 hours:  
The LAMP indicator blinks on the projector.  
“Lamp replacement” appears on the screen and the word “Warning”  
blinks.  
* To cancel this message, press the EXIT button.  
However, the same message will appear every hour.  
* If the projector is put in stand-by mode or turned off after the lamp has  
been used for more than 2000 hours, it can not be turned back on  
again unless the light-source lamp is replaced with a new one.  
(If the projector is not put in stand-by mode or turned off, it can be  
used until 2010 hours is reached.)  
Lamp-replacement  
opening cover  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Warning  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Be careful not to damage  
the claw.  
Replace with a new lamp (lamp unit) and reset the lamp time. (Refer  
to page 62.)  
When the lamp use time reaches 2010 hours:  
The projector is forcibly turned off.  
The LAMP and OPERATE indicators blinks on the projector.  
* The projector can not be turned on unless the lamp (lamp unit) is  
replaced with a new one and the lamp time is reset. (Refer to  
page 62.)  
2
Loosen the screws, raise the handle,  
and pull out the light-source lamp.  
Loosen the two screws with a flat-end screwdriver.  
Screw  
Note  
• The screws are fitted so that they do not come off the light-  
source lamp.  
CAUTIONS  
• If the projector is set up in a constricted place which is unsuitable for work, and if you perform replacement work there, this  
could cause injury. Move the projector to a place large enough for work, and then replace the light-source lamp.  
• Use a genuine product for the light-source lamp. If you use other than a genuine product, this could cause a malfunction.  
Also, never use an old light-source lamp. This could cause marked degradation in performance or explode, possibly causing  
the projector to malfunction or broken pieces to injure you.  
Light-source lamp  
• Do not replace the light-source lamp immediately after the projector has been used. The temperature of the light-source  
lamp is still high and could cause a burn. Allow a cooling period of one hour or more before performing replacement.  
• Before starting light-source lamp replacement work, turn off the MAIN POWER switch, and disconnect the power cord from  
the wall outlet. If you perform the replacement work with the power cord connected, this could cause injury or electric shock.  
• The light-source lamp used in this projector is a high pressure mercury lamp. Be careful when disposing of the light-source  
lamp. If anything is unclear, please consult your dealer.  
Handle  
(To be continued on the next page)  
60  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
Replacing the Light-Source Lamp  
I Resetting the Lamp Use Time  
After replacing with a new light-source lamp, reset the lamp-time counter inside the projector to clear the accumulated lamp  
time to zero (0). After resetting, a new count will start for the new light-source lamp.  
3
Insert the new light-source lamp fully  
inside and fasten the screws.  
Fasten the two screws with a flat-end screwdriver.  
Light-source lamp  
CAUTION  
1
Turn on the MAIN POWER switch to go  
into stand-by mode.  
In stand-by mode, the STAND BY indicator on the  
projector lights up.  
I Projector’s button  
• Do not touch the glass surface of the light-source lamp  
directly with your hand as well as staining it. If you touch  
with a bare hand, oils and other substances on your hand  
may adhere to the lamp, possibly preventing it from  
performing as specified and therefore giving a shortened  
lamp life, a darkened screen, etc. To handle a new light-  
source lamp, hold it by the plastic part. Never touch the  
metal part or the front glass surface.  
STAND BY  
indicator  
OPERATE  
indicator  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
LAMP  
TEMP  
2
Press the following buttons on the  
projector, sequentially.  
HIDE  
4
HIDE  
button  
PC  
1
PC  
Handle  
1
2
3
4
Momentary press the PC button.  
Momentary press the ENTER button.  
Momentary press the EXIT button.  
KEYSTONE  
PRESET  
button  
VIDEO  
MENU  
Screw  
MENU  
button  
Press and hold the HIDE button for two seconds  
or more.  
2
ENTER  
button  
3
EXIT  
button  
EXIT  
ENTER  
* During this sequence, the STAND BY and OPERATE  
indicators alternately blink about every approx. 3 seconds.  
After completion of the sequence, the STAND BY indicator  
alone stays on.  
* Buttons must be pressed within 2 seconds of the previous  
button.  
Cursor buttons 5/∞  
4
Replace the lamp-replacement opening  
cover and fasten the screws.  
Fasten the two screws with a flat-end screwdriver.  
Lamp-replacement  
opening cover  
* When you make a mistake in button operations, return to  
the beginning of the sequence.  
* To check the lamp time on the menu, press the MENU button  
CAUTIONS  
and select “Information” with the cursor button 5or ∞  
.
• Install the light-source lamp and close the lamp-  
The lamp use time is indicated in the item “Lamp time”.  
replacement opening cover correctly; otherwise, a safety  
switch is activated to prevent the projector from operating.  
• If the claw on the lamp-replacement opening cover is  
damaged, the projector may not possibly operate. Then,  
replace with a new lamp-replacement opening cover.  
Video main menu  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Input  
VIDEO  
CH.0  
Setting  
Be careful not to  
damage the claw.  
Switcher  
Source  
5
Reset the lamp use time.  
Perform “Resetting the Lamp Use Time” on page 62.  
Color temp.  
Options  
NTSC  
Language  
Information  
Lamp time  
123 h  
Lamp time (0 h)  
PC main menu  
Menu  
Image adj.  
Setting  
Input  
PC 1  
CH.0  
Switcher  
Color temp.  
Options  
Resolution 1280 1024  
Frequency H  
Frequency V  
Lamp time  
79.9 kHz  
75 Hz  
Language  
Information  
123  
h
Lamp time (0 h)  
CAUTION  
• Reset the lamp use time only when you have replaced with  
a new light-source lamp. Never reset it during lamp life,  
otherwise the replacement time may become unclear, and  
lead to degraded performance or lamp explosion.  
61  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Solutions to common problems related to your projector are described here. If none of the solutions presented here solves the  
problem, unplug the projector and consult an authorized dealer or Service Center.  
Cleaning and Replacing the Filter Cover  
Clean the filter regularly. If the filter is heavily stained and does not clean, or if it is damaged, replace the filter with a new filter.  
Otherwise, dirt may get inside and appear on the screen, preventing you from fully enjoying the video image. If dirt gets inside  
or if you need information about the filter, consult authorized dealer where you purchased the projector or the nearest Service  
Center.  
Symptom  
Power is not  
supplied.  
Probable cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
30  
Is the power cord disconnected?  
Insert the power cord (plug) firmly.  
Turn on the MAIN POWER switch.  
1
2
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch.  
After the projector goes into stand-by state with the STAND BY indicator on, turn off the MAIN POWER switch and pull  
out the power cord from the projector and the wall outlet.  
Is the MAIN POWER switch turned  
on?  
32  
Is the fuse blown?  
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch and  
check the fuse.  
If it is blown, replace it  
57  
Remove the filter.  
Loosen the screw with a flat-end screwdriver.  
Is the lamp-replacement opening cover  
closed correctly?  
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch, close  
the lamp-replacement opening cover  
correctly, and turn on the MAIN POWER  
switch again.  
7, 32, 60  
Screw  
Is the filter closed correctly?  
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch, fit the  
filter correctly, and turn on the MAIN  
POWER switch again.  
7, 32, 63  
Filter  
Has the lamp life expired? (Has the  
lamp use time reached 1000 hours in  
the normal mode?)  
• Turn off the MAIN POWER switch, replace 32, 58,  
with a new light-source lamp, and turn on  
the MAIN POWER switch.  
59, 62  
(Has the lamp use time reached 2000  
hours in the LPC or LOC mode?)  
Reset the lamp use time after replacing with  
a new lamp.  
Light is not emitted,  
or light level is low.  
Is the lens cap removed?  
Remove the lens cap.  
30  
Is the lamp life near its end?  
Check the lamp use time on the menu, and 56, 58,  
if the lamp life is near its end, arrange for a  
replacement lamp, or replace a little earlier.  
59  
Be careful not to  
damage the claws.  
With power on,  
operation starts but  
stops in a few  
minutes.  
Is the air intake or exhaust area  
blocked?  
Turn off the MAIN POWER switch, remove 6, 7, 32  
any blocking objects, and turn on the MAIN  
POWER switch again.  
Notes  
• The screw is fitted so that it does not come off the filter.  
• If the filter is clogged with dirt, etc., the projector goes into an warning state (the OPERATE and STAND BY indicator blink.  
etc.). Therefore regularly, clean the filter. For the warning indication, refer to page 67.  
Video image does not  
appear.  
Is the correct input selected?  
Select the correct input with the VIDEO and  
PC buttons.  
9, 13  
Are devices connected correctly?  
Connect devices correctly.  
11, 22  
3
Clean the filter.  
Clean the filter with a neutral detergent, wash it in water, and then dry it in the shade.  
Are signals being supplied from the  
connected devices?  
Set connected devices correctly.  
Are input signals (scanning frequency,  
etc.) appropriate?  
Check if the signal is appropriate (scanning 22, 23  
frequency, etc.) and input the appropriate  
signal.  
Is the correct color system selected?  
Set the color system to AUTO or to the  
correct dedicated color system.  
45  
Is brightness adjusted correctly?  
Adjust brightness on the menu.  
49  
Is video turned off by pressing the  
HIDE button?  
Press the HIDE button to turn video on.  
10, 12,  
35  
During DVI input, are image signals  
output from the computer graphic  
board (DVI output terminal)?  
(During DVI input, depending on the  
computer settings, there may be no  
signal input or an error may occur (blue  
screen).)  
If this happens, turn off the power to both  
the projector and the computer, and then  
turn the projector back on before turning the  
computer on again. Then correctly set the  
computer’s graphic board.  
22  
CAUTIONS  
• Put on rubber gloves when using neutral detergent.  
• After you have washed the filter in water, make sure the filter is completely dry before reinstalling it, otherwise an electric  
shock or malfunction could occur.  
• Do not clean the filter using a vacuum cleaner. Since the filter is soft, it may be sucked into the vacuum cleaner or damaged.  
Video image dims.  
Is focus adjusted correctly?  
Adjust focus.  
12, 34  
4
Reinstall the filter.  
Fasten the screw with a flat-end screwdriver.  
Is distance too short or too long?  
Set the projector at the correct distance.  
18, 76,  
77  
Are Tracking and Phase adjusted  
correctly?  
If satisfactory results are not obtained by  
pressing the QUICK ALIGN. button to  
conduct quick alignment, adjust Tracking  
and Phase on the menu.  
13, 36,  
47  
Notes  
• Install the filter correctly. Otherwise, the projector does not operate. (Goes into an warning state (For the warning indication,  
Refer to page 66).)  
• If the filter’s claws (in particular the claw which is hidden behind the filter cover knob) are damaged, the projector may not  
operate. Then, replace with a new filter.  
Video image is  
abnormally dark or  
bright.  
Is picture quality (Brightness, etc.)  
adjusted correctly?  
Adjust picture quality on the menu.  
49  
Video image freezes.  
Was the FREEZE button on the  
remote control pressed?  
Press the FREEZE button to release  
freezing.  
12, 37  
64  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Warning Indication  
If something abnormal has occurred with the projector, the warning status will be indicated by the combination of lighting the  
indicators on the control panel as shown in the following table. Then, the projector automatically stops projection and runs the  
cooling fan for about 120 seconds.  
Symptom  
Probable cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
A part of image is  
magnified.  
Was the DIGITAL ZOOM T button on  
the remote control pressed?  
Press the PRESET button to restore the  
original video screen.  
12, 37  
Color is poor or  
unstable.  
Is picture quality (color density, etc.)  
adjusted correctly?  
Adjust picture quality on the menu.  
49  
Warning indication table:  
Indicator  
Is the correct color system selected?  
Set the color system to AUTO or to the  
correct dedicated color system.  
45  
No.  
Warning content  
LAMP  
Blink  
TEMP  
STAND BY  
OPERATE  
Are signals (scanning frequency, etc.)  
of the connected devices appropriate?  
Check if the signal is appropriate (scanning  
frequency, etc.), and input the appropriate  
signal.  
22  
1
2
Blink  
The light-source lamp does not light and projection  
is not made.  
The upper part of the  
video image bows or  
distorts.  
While computer system signal is input,  
isn’t a sync signal for composite sync  
(Cs) or G on sync being input?  
Input separate sync signals for vertical sync 11, 28  
(V) and horizontal sync (H) signals.  
Blink  
Blink  
Blink  
The light-source lamp has suddenly gone off during  
projecting an image.  
3
4
5
6
7
Blink  
Circuit operation is abnormal.  
Isn’t signal with much jitter or skew  
distortion being input from a video  
deck?  
Input signals with little jitter or distortion.  
Use a TBC or a device with a built-in TBC.  
Blink  
Blink  
Blink  
The filter is displaced.  
Blink  
Blink  
Blink  
The internal temperature is too high. (Sensor 1)  
The internal temperature is too high. (Sensor 2)  
The cooling fan has stopped (locked).  
Video image  
suddenly go out.  
Is video picture turned off by pressing  
the HIDE button?  
Turn on video picture by pressing the HIDE 10, 12,  
button.  
35  
Blink  
Blink  
Remote control unit  
does not work.  
Are batteries installed correctly?  
Match the polarities of batteries correctly (+  
to + and – to –).  
14  
Blink  
* For individual indicator lighting, refer to page 58.  
Are batteries exhausted?  
Replace with new batteries.  
14  
20  
Is there a shielding object between the  
remote control unit and the remote  
sensor?  
Remove any shielding objects.  
I
Action to be taken for warning indication  
Stopping the projector:  
After the cooling fan has stopped, take the following action.  
Is the distance too long?  
Use the remote control unit at a nearer  
point.  
20  
21  
Is either side of remote cable  
disconnected?  
Firmly insert the remote cable when using  
the remote control unit as the wired one.  
No. 1  
No. 2  
No. 3  
:
:
:
Check that the cover for replacing the light-source lamp and the front panel are securely attached, and then, press  
the OPERATE button for one second or more to turn on the projector for retrying.  
Check that the cover for replacing the light-source lamp and the front panel are securely attached, and then, press  
the OPERATE button for one second or more to turn on the projector for retrying.  
* This device uses a computer. External noise may cause it to malfunction. If this happens, turn the power off, remove the  
electric plug from the wall outlet. Then insert the electric plug back into the wall outlet, turn the power back on and check the  
operation.  
Press the OPERATE button for one second or more to turn on the projector for retrying.  
Nos. 4-7 : Follow the next steps.  
I When warning indication is shown by the blinking indicators:  
The warning status will be notified by the combination lighting of the projector’s indicators.  
For the warning contents and the action to be taken, refer to “Warning Indication” on page 66.  
1. Turn off the MAIN POWER switch and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
2. Take an action according to the number.  
No. 4  
No. 5  
No. 6  
No. 7  
:
:
:
:
Set the filter in place.Then, leave the projector until it cools down.  
Check that nothing is blocking the air inlet nor outlet, and wait until the inside cools down.  
Check that nothing is blocking the air inlet nor outlet, and wait until the inside cools down.  
Leave the projector until it cools down.  
I
Maintenance  
• Stains on the cabinet  
3. Plug in the power cord again, turn on the MAIN POWER switch, and press the OPERATE button for one second or  
more to turn on the projector for retrying.  
These should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the cabinet is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted  
neutral detergent and wring well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.  
• Since the cabinet may deteriorate in quality, become damaged, or show paint peeled, note the following:  
– Do not wipe with rough cloth.  
– Do not wipe vigorously.  
– Do not wipe with thinner or benzene.  
– Do not apply any volatile substance such as insecticides.  
– Do not allow any rubber or vinyl article to remain in contact with the cabinet for a long time.  
• Stains on the lens  
Retrying operation:  
Plug in the power cord again and operate the projector.  
If the same warning indication is observed again, after the cooling fan has stopped, turn off the MAIN POWER switch, unplug  
the power cord, and call your dealer for repair.  
These should be cleaned off with commercially available lens blowers or lens cleaning paper (for cleaning glasses and  
cameras).  
Do not use liquid cleaning agents. This could cause the surface coating to be removed.  
Do not rub, scratch or hit the lens as its surface is prone to damage.  
65  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning Messages  
Warning Messages  
The following shows the warning messages that can be displayed on the screen. When a warning message is displayed, take  
Message  
Cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
the corrective action described here.  
When the DIGITAL ZOOM button  
is pressed for the video signals  
that cannot be zoomed (UXGA  
60Hz, SXGA 60Hz.), this  
message appears for a few  
seconds to notify that the image  
cannot be digitally zoomed.  
To forcibly clear the message,  
press the EXIT button.  
Digital-zoom function does not  
work for the inputted video  
signals.  
To use the this function, input the  
video signals that can be digitally  
zoomed.  
13, 37  
Message  
Cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
No device is connected to the  
input terminal.  
The terminal is connected but no  
signal is output from the  
connected device.  
The selected input mode (input  
terminal) name is shown in the  
first line of the massage.  
Connect a device to the selected  
terminal.  
Operate the connected device  
and output a signal.  
9, 11,  
24 ~ 29,  
33  
D.ZOOM  
*
PC  
1
*
No Input  
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to NORMAL MODE  
Arrange for a new lamp (lamp  
unit) or replace the lamp early.  
44, 46  
Appears every time the projector  
is turned on after the lamp use  
time has exceeded 900 hours and  
until it reaches 1000 hours.  
The message is cleared by  
pressing any button.  
The frequency of the input video  
signal is out of range.  
The selected input mode (input  
terminal) name is shown in the  
first line of the message.  
Input the video signals whose  
frequency is within the projector’s  
specifications.  
22, 23,  
70  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
*
PC  
1
Frequency of input signal is out of range.  
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to NORMAL MODE  
Replace with a new lamp (lamp  
unit) and reset the lamp time.  
44, 46  
When the lamp use time reaches  
1000 hours, the word “Warning”  
blinks on the screen.  
To cancel this message, press  
the EXIT button.  
However, the same message will  
appear every hour.  
If the power is turned off after the  
lamp use time has exceeded  
1000 hours, the power can not be  
turned on again.  
Though the frequency of the input  
video signal is within the  
acceptable range, other items  
such as resolution are out of the  
projector’s specifications.  
The selected input mode (input  
terminal) name is shown in the  
first line of the message.  
Input the video signals that  
satisfies the projector’s  
specifications.  
22, 23,  
70  
Warning  
*
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
PC  
1
Signal is not supported.  
*
*
When the lamp use time reaches  
1010 hours, the projector is  
forcibly turned off and can not be  
turned back on again.  
When the FREEZE button is  
pressed, this message appears  
for a few seconds.  
When a button not acceptable is  
pressed during freezing, this  
message appears for a few  
seconds to notify that the image is  
being frozen.  
To release freezing, press the  
FREEZE button on the remote  
control.  
12, 37  
FREEZE  
When the FREEZE button is  
pressed for the video signals that  
cannot be frozen (UXGA 60Hz,  
SXGA 60Hz.), this message  
appears for a few seconds to  
notify that the image cannot be  
frozen.  
Freeze function does not work for 12, 37  
the inputted video signals.  
To use this function, input the  
video signals that can be frozen.  
FREEZE  
*
To forcibly clear the message,  
press the EXIT button.  
68  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning Messages  
Specifications  
Message  
Cause  
Corrective action  
Page  
I
Optical mechanism system  
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to LIGHT OUTPUT  
CONTROL MODE (LOC) or LIGHT  
POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC)  
and the lamp use time display is  
turned [ON] with the OSD menu  
Displayed when the lamp use  
time exceeds 1000 hours.  
The message does not appear if  
the lamp use time display is  
turned [OFF] with the OSD menu.  
Arrange for a new lamp (lamp  
unit) or replace the lamp early.  
44, 46  
Projection method  
D-ILA® (Direct Drive Image Light Amplifier) method  
(Reflective-type active-matrix method)  
D-ILA® device  
Projecting lens  
2.3 cm measured diagonally (1365 pixels × 1024 pixels) × 3  
(Total number of pixels : 4,193,280)  
1000  
h
GL-M2910G:  
GL-M2915SG: 1.5:1 (with ±2% zooming/shift function)  
GL-M2920ZG: × 1.5 zoom lens (2:1 to 3:1) (zooming function)  
GL-M2930SZG: × 1.9 zoom lens (2.9 to 5.5:1) (zooming/shift function)  
1:1  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
*
Screen size  
GL-M2910G: Refer to page 76.  
GL-M2915SG: Refer to page 76.  
GL-M2920ZG: Refer to page 77.  
GL-M2930SZG: Refer to page 77.  
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to LIGHT OUTPUT  
CONTROL MODE (LOC) or LIGHT  
POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC)  
Appears every time the projector  
is turned on after the lamp use  
time has exceeded 1900 hours  
and until it reaches 2000 hours.  
The message is cleared by  
pressing any button.  
Arrange for a new lamp (lamp  
unit) or replace the lamp early.  
44, 46  
Projection distance  
GL-M2910G:  
Refer to page 76.  
GL-M2915SG: Refer to page 76.  
GL-M2920ZG: Refer to page 77.  
GL-M2930SZG: Refer to page 77.  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
Light-source lamp  
420 W xenon lamp  
I
Electrical system  
*
Color system  
NTSC, NTSC4.43, PAL, SECAM (Automatic switching / manual switching)  
Resolution1365  
dots × 1024 dots (S-XGA full resolution, during RGB input)  
Displayed when the lamp control  
setting is set to LIGHT OUTPUT  
CONTROL MODE (LOC) or LIGHT  
POWER CONTROL MODE (LPC)  
Replace with a new lamp (lamp  
unit) and reset the lamp use time.  
44, 46  
1000 TV lines (Horizontal resolution, aspect ratio 4 : 3, during video input)  
Scanning frequency  
Horizontal frequency : 15 kHz ~ 105 kHz  
Vertical frequency  
: 50 Hz ~ 100 Hz  
When the lamp use time reaches  
2000 hours, the word “Warning”  
blinks on the screen.  
To cancel this message, press  
the EXIT button.  
Warning  
Audio power output  
1 W (monaural), 4 cm round type micro-speaker × 1  
Lamp replacement  
EXIT  
I
Input terminals  
*
[AV IN]  
However, the same message will  
appear every hour.  
If the power is turned off after the  
lamp use time has exceeded  
2000 hours, the power can not be  
turned on again.  
When the lamp use time reaches  
2010 hours, the projector is  
forcibly turned off and can not be  
turned back on again.  
Y/C  
1-line, mini-DIN 4 pin × 1 (for S-video)  
1-line, BNC × 1 (for composite video)  
1-line, BNC × 3 (for computer, DTV or video)  
Component (Y, B-Y, R-Y) signal  
VIDEO  
*
*
Y, B-Y, R-Y  
Y, PB, PR  
DTV-format (Y, PB, PR) signal  
[PC 1]  
R, G, B, H, V  
1-line, D-sub 3-row 15 pin × 1 (for computer)  
Memo  
[PC 2]  
The message display language corresponds to the menu display language setting. This is set to “English (English)” when the  
projector is bought. The display language can be selected from 6 languages. (Refer to page 46.) However, the input mode  
(PC1, PC2, DVI, Y/C, VIDEO, COMP) and button indications (FREEZE, D.ZOOM, EXIT) are only displayed in English  
irrespective of the display language setting.  
1-line, BNC × 5 (for computer, DTV or video)  
Analog RGB signal  
R, B, G  
H/Cs, V  
Horizontal (H) sync/composite (CS) sync, Vertical (V) sync signal  
The language settings in the section are explained in “English”.  
[DVI]  
1-line, DVI-D 24-pin × 1  
[CONTROL]  
RS-232C  
1-line, D-sub 9-pin × 1  
* RS-232C-interface specified control terminal for controlling this projector with a personal  
computer.  
REMOTE  
1-line, stereo mini-jack × 1  
* Remote terminal for connecting with the remote control unit.  
I
Output terminal  
PC OUT  
1-line, D-sub 3-row 15-pin × 1 (output for display monitor)  
CONTROL OUT  
1-line, D-sub 9-pin × 1  
* RS-232C-interface specified control terminal for controlling this projector with a personal  
computer.  
69  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
I
General  
Outside dimensions  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
200 V - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
4 A  
I Top  
Allowable operation  
temperature  
+ 5°C to + 35°C  
Unit: mm  
505*1  
*1: Protrusion excluded  
*2: Lens excluded  
Allowable relative  
humidity  
20% to 80% (no condensation)  
– 10°C to + 60°C  
E N T E R  
E X I T  
Allowable storage  
temperature  
M E N U  
V I D E O  
P R E S E T  
O
N
E
K
E
Y
S
T
P C  
H I D E  
E T  
O P E R A  
T B Y  
T E M P  
L A M P  
A
N
S
D
Dimensions  
Approx. 505 mm × 265 mm × 393 mm  
[Carrying band, Excluding protrusions]  
(Width × Height × Depth)  
Weight  
Approx. 14.6 kg  
Accessories  
(Refer to page 5.)  
* Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
* D-ILA devices are manufactured with a very high-precision technology, allowing 99.99% of the pixels to be effective. Only  
0.01% or less of the pixels are missing or always on.  
133  
* For easy understanding, pictures and illustrations maybe emphasized, composed or have omissions and may be more or  
less different from actual products.  
* TRADEMARKS  
D-ILA is a trademark of Victor Company of Japan, Limited.  
I Front  
I Side  
IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Macintosh is a registered  
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
505*1  
393*2  
VESA is a trademark of the non-profit organization Video Electronics Standards Association.  
All other product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only, and may be the trademarks or  
registered trademarks of their respective companies.  
256  
70  
52  
392  
72  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
RS-232C external control  
By connecting a computer to the RS-232C terminal, you can control the projector. Use a reverse connection cable as the RS-  
232C connection cable.  
The commands to control the projector and the response data against the received commands are explained here.  
For further information, please consult the dealer where you purchased your projector or consult the Service Center.  
Pin assignment (Specifications for terminals)  
I Y/C terminal  
Pin number  
Signal name  
1. Communication Specifications  
The communication specifications are as follows:  
1
2
3
4
GND (Y)  
4
2
3
1
GND (C)  
Baud rate  
Data length  
Parity  
9600bps / 19200bps*  
Y
C
8 bits  
None  
1 bit  
Stop bit  
I RS-232C terminal  
Flow control  
None  
* Factory set value. To change the value, refer to “Setting and Adjusting Other Functions (OPTIONS)” on page 54.  
Pin number  
Signal name  
Pin number  
Signal name  
9
8
7
6
2. Command Format  
2-1. Command data format (from the computer to the projector)  
1
2
3
4
5
N/C  
RD  
6
7
8
9
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
When sending a control command, use the following data format.  
TD  
Header  
ID  
SP  
Command  
SP  
Parameter  
CR  
N/C  
GND  
5
4
3
2
1
Header: Designates the head of data and the kind of data.  
“!” (21h): Control command to the projector  
“?” (3Fh): Query to the projector (Asking command)  
“1” (fixed)  
Designates the delimiter for ID, Command, and Parameter. (20h)  
Designates the terminal of the data. (0Dh)  
ID:  
SP:  
CR:  
I PC1 terminal/PC OUT terminal  
Pin number  
Signal name  
Red  
Pin number  
Signal name  
N/C  
* [ ] is not necessary when Asking command.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11 12 13 14 15  
2-2. Response data format (from the projector to the computer)  
Green10  
Blue  
GND  
(SYNC)  
GND  
Upon executing the received control command, the projector sends back the following response data to the computer.  
Header ID SP Normal Termination Status SP Parameter CR  
Header: Designates the head of data.  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
H.SYNC  
V.SYNC  
N/C  
“@” (40h): Fetches data from the projector.  
“1” (fixed)  
Designates the delimiter for ID, Command, and Parameter (20h)  
6
7
1
2
8 3  
4
5
9 10  
GND (Red)  
GND (Green)  
GND (Blue)  
ID:  
SP:  
Normal Termination Status: “0” (30h)  
CR:  
Designates the terminal of the data (0Dh)  
I DVI terminal  
Pin  
number  
Pin  
number  
Pin  
number  
Signal name  
Signal name  
T.M.D.S.Data1-  
Signal name  
1
2
3
T.M.D.S.Data2-  
9
17  
T.M.D.S.Data0-  
T.M.D.S.Data0+  
9
11 13 15  
10 12 14 16  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
T.M.D.S.Data2+ 10  
T.M.D.S.Data1+ 18  
T.M.D.S.Data2  
Shield  
11  
T.M.D.S.Data1  
Shield  
19  
T.M.D.S.Data0  
Shield  
4
5
6
No Connect  
No Connect  
DDC Clock  
12  
13  
14  
No Connect  
No Connect  
+5V Power  
20  
21  
22  
No Connect  
No Connect  
17 19 21 23  
18 20 22 24  
T.M.D.S. Clock  
Shield  
7
8
DDC Data  
15  
16  
Ground (for +5 V) 23  
Hot Plug Detect 24  
T.M.D.S. Clock +  
T.M.D.S. Clock -  
No Connect  
73  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
RS-232C external control  
2-3 Parameters used for the data format  
I Relationship between Projection Distances and Projection Screen Sizes  
The following three kinds of parameters are prepared for the control command and response data.  
Notes  
• The relationship between the projection distances and projection screen sizes differs depending on the lens unit (optional)  
you are using.  
• The projection distance and projection screen sizes listed here are only for a guide. Use them as reference when setting the  
projector.  
(1) Numeric value  
Designates the 2-byte hexadecimal value with the sign as the 4-digit (byte) characters.  
Designation allowable range: “8000” to “7FFF”  
(2) ON/OFF  
For lens unit GL-M2910G (1:1):  
Designates the status (ON/OFF) of the projector, such as POWER and HIDE.  
Approximate projection distance unit: ft (m)  
Projection screen size  
Character  
Hex.  
30  
Meaning  
OFF  
(Diagonal length)  
For 4:3 aspect-ratio screens  
For 16:9 aspect-ration screens  
“0”  
“1”  
36.7" (approx. 93.2 cm)  
40" (approx. 101.6 cm)  
50" (approx. 127.0 cm)  
60" (approx. 152.4 cm)  
70" (approx. 177.8 cm)  
80" (approx. 203.2 cm)  
90" (approx. 228.6 cm)  
100" (approx. 254.0 cm)  
110" (approx. 279.4 cm)  
120" (approx. 304.8 cm)  
130" (approx. 330.2 cm)  
140" (approx. 355.6 cm)  
150" (approx. 381.0 cm)  
160" (approx. 406.4 cm)  
170" (approx. 431.8 cm)  
180" (approx. 457.2 cm)  
190" (approx. 482.6 cm)  
200" (approx. 508.0 cm)  
---  
2.53 (0.77)  
2.76 (0.84)  
3.48 (1.06)  
4.20 (1.28)  
4.95 (1.51)  
5.68 (1.73)  
6.40 (1.95)  
7.12 (2.17)  
7.87 (2.40)  
8.60 (2.62)  
9.32 (2.84)  
10.04 (3.06)  
10.79 (3.29)  
11.52 (3.51)  
12.24 (3.73)  
12.96 (3.95)  
13.68 (4.17)  
---  
31  
ON  
2.53 (0.77)  
3.18 (0.97)  
3.84 (1.17)  
4.53 (1.38)  
5.18 (1.58)  
5.87 (1.79)  
6.53 (1.99)  
7.22 (2.20)  
7.87 (2.40)  
8.53 (2.60)  
9.22 (2.81)  
9.88 (3.01)  
10.56 (3.22)  
11.22 (3.42)  
11.88 (3.62)  
12.57 (3.83)  
13.22 (4.03)  
(3) Special parameters  
Input switching parameters:  
Character  
Hex.  
30  
Meaning  
Y/C  
“0”  
“1”  
“2”  
“3”  
“4”  
“5”  
31  
VIDEO  
COMP  
PC1  
32  
33  
34  
PC2  
35  
DVI  
Operation mode parameters:  
Character  
“0000”  
Hex.  
Meaning  
30h, 30h, 30h, 30h  
30h, 30h, 30h, 31h  
30h, 30h, 30h, 32h  
30h, 30h, 30h, 34h  
Stand-by mode  
Power-on mode  
Cool-down mode  
Warning mode  
For lens unit GL-M2915SG (1.5:1):  
“0001”  
Approximate projection distance unit: ft (m)  
Projection screen size  
(Diagonal length)  
“0002”  
For 4:3 aspect-ratio screens  
For 16:9 aspect-ration screens  
“0004”  
55" (approx. 139.7 cm)  
60" (approx. 152.4 cm)  
65" (approx. 165.1 cm)  
70" (approx. 177.8 cm)  
75" (approx. 190.5 cm)  
80" (approx. 203.2 cm)  
85" (approx. 215.9 cm)  
90" (approx. 228.6 cm)  
95" (approx. 241.3 cm)  
100" (approx. 254.0 cm)  
105" (approx. 266.7 cm)  
110" (approx. 279.4 cm)  
115" (approx. 292.1 cm)  
120" (approx. 304.8 cm)  
125" (approx. 317.5 cm)  
130" (approx. 330.2 cm)  
135" (approx. 342.9 cm)  
140" (approx. 355.6 cm)  
145" (approx. 368.3 cm)  
150" (approx. 381.0 cm)  
---  
6.00 (1.83)  
6.30 (1.92)  
6.82 (2.08)  
7.38 (2.25)  
7.91 (2.41)  
8.46 (2.58)  
9.02 (2.75)  
9.55 (2.91)  
10.10 (3.08)  
10.63 (3.24)  
11.19 (3.41)  
11.75 (3.58)  
12.27 (3.74)  
12.83 (3.91)  
13.35 (4.07)  
13.91 (4.24)  
14.44 (4.40)  
---  
5.77 (1.76)  
6.27 (1.91)  
6.76 (2.06)  
7.28 (2.22)  
7.78 (2.37)  
8.27 (2.52)  
8.76 (2.67)  
9.28 (2.83)  
9.78 (2.98)  
10.27 (3.13)  
10.76 (3.28)  
11.25 (3.43)  
11.78 (3.59)  
12.27 (3.74)  
12.76 (3.89)  
13.25 (4.04)  
13.75 (4.19)  
14.27 (4.35)  
14.76 (4.50)  
3. Control command table  
The control commands that can be sent from the computer are as follows:  
Asking  
Kind of data  
ON/OFF  
Function  
OPERATE  
Command  
Power ON  
ELSE  
Numeric Value  
Special Data  
U0F  
U00  
U17  
U18  
U40  
U1A  
I
I
I
I
HIDE  
I
I
I
I
Right Left rev.  
Top Bottom inv.  
Keystone  
Input  
I
Y/C, VIDEO, PC1, PC2,  
COMP, DVI  
I
I
Operation mode  
Z03  
Stand-by, Power-on,  
Cool-down, Warning  
I
---  
* Keystone: Numeric value can range from “FF80” to “0080”  
* Operation mode: Only Asking command is possible  
---  
76  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
For lens unit GL-M2920ZG (2 to 3:1):  
Approximate projection distance unit: ft (m)  
For 4:3 aspect-ratio screens For 16:9 aspect-ration screens  
Projection screen size  
(Diagonal length)  
Wide end  
Tele end  
Wide end  
Tele end  
40" (approx. 101.6 cm)  
42" (approx. 106.7 cm)  
50" (approx. 127.0 cm)  
60" (approx. 152.4 cm)  
70" (approx. 177.8 cm)  
80" (approx. 203.2 cm)  
100" (approx. 254.0 cm)  
150" (approx. 381.0 cm)  
200" (approx. 508.0 cm)  
240" (approx. 609.6 cm)  
250" (approx. 635.0 cm)  
300" (approx. 762.0 cm)  
310" (approx. 787.4 cm)  
320" (approx. 812.8 cm)  
330" (approx. 838.2 cm)  
340" (approx. 863.6 cm)  
350" (approx. 889.0 cm)  
400" (approx. 1016.0 cm)  
450" (approx. 1143.0 cm)  
470" (approx. 1193.8 cm)  
480" (approx. 1219.2 cm)  
500" (approx. 1270.0 cm)  
521" (approx. 1323.3 cm)  
---------  
---------  
8.23 (2.51)  
9.74 (2.97)  
11.65 (3.55)  
13.55 (4.13)  
15.42 (4.70)  
19.23 (5.86)  
28.71 (8.75)  
38.16 (11.63)  
45.73 (13.94)  
47.64 (14.52)  
57.09 (17.40)  
58.99 (17.98)  
60.89 (18.56)  
62.76 (19.13)  
64.67 (19.71)  
---------  
---------  
8.53 (2.60)  
9.96 (2.73)  
10.60 (3.23)  
12.66 (3.86)  
14.73 (4.49)  
16.80 (5.12)  
20.90 (6.37)  
31.23 (9.52)  
41.54 (12.66)  
49.80 (15.18)  
51.87 (15.81)  
62.17 (18.95)  
64.24 (19.58)  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
8.50 (2.59)  
9.84 (3.00)  
11.22 (3.42)  
13.94 (4.25)  
20.77 (6.33)  
27.59 (8.41)  
33.04 (10.07)  
34.38 (10.48)  
41.21 (12.56)  
42.59 (12.98)  
43.93 (13.39)  
45.31 (13.81)  
46.65 (14.22)  
48.03 (14.64)  
54.86 (16.72)  
61.65 (18.79)  
64.37 (19.62)  
---------  
9.09 (2.77)  
10.33 (3.15)  
12.83 (3.91)  
19.09 (5.82)  
25.33 (7.72)  
30.35 (9.25)  
31.59 (9.63)  
37.86 (11.54)  
39.11 (11.92)  
40.35 (12.30)  
41.60 (12.68)  
42.85 (13.06)  
44.09 (13.44)  
50.36 (15.35)  
56.63 (17.26)  
59.12 (18.02)  
60.37 (18.40)  
62.89 (19.17)  
65.52 (19.97)  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
For lens unit GL-M2930SZG (2.9 to 5.5:1):  
Projection screen size  
Approximate projection distance unit: ft(m)  
For 4:3 aspect-ratio screens For 16:9 aspect-ration screens  
(Diagonal length)  
Wide end  
Tele end  
Wide end  
Tele end  
40" (approx. 101.6 cm)  
50" (approx. 127.0 cm)  
60" (approx. 152.4 cm)  
70" (approx. 177.8 cm)  
80" (approx. 203.2 cm)  
100" (approx. 254.0 cm)  
150" (approx. 381.0 cm)  
200" (approx. 508.0 cm)  
240" (approx. 609.6 cm)  
250" (approx. 635.0 cm)  
260" (approx. 660.4 cm)  
270" (approx. 685.8 cm)  
280" (approx. 711.2 cm)  
300" (approx. 762.0 cm)  
350" (approx. 889.0 cm)  
400" (approx. 1016.0 cm)  
470" (approx. 1193.8 cm)  
480" (approx. 1219.2 cm)  
500" (approx. 1270.0 cm)  
510" (approx. 1295.4 cm)  
---------  
14.83 (4.52)  
18.44 (5.62)  
22.05 (6.72)  
25.66 (7.82)  
29.30 (8.93)  
36.52 (11.13)  
54.59 (16.64)  
72.67 (22.15)  
87.14 (26.56)  
90.78 (27.67)  
94.39 (28.77)  
97.99 (29.87)  
---------  
---------  
16.11 (4.91)  
20.05 (6.11)  
23.98 (7.31)  
27.92 (8.51)  
31.86 (9.71)  
39.76 (12.12)  
59.45 (18.12)  
79.17 (24.13)  
94.91 (28.93)  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
14.83 (4.52)  
16.93 (5.16)  
21.06 (6.42)  
31.43 (9.58)  
41.77 (12.73)  
50.07 (15.26)  
52.13 (15.89)  
54.20 (16.52)  
56.27 (17.15)  
58.33 (17.78)  
62.50 (19.05)  
72.83 (22.20)  
83.20 (25.36)  
97.70 (29.78)  
---------  
15.55 (4.74)  
19.36 (5.90)  
28.87 (8.80)  
38.39 (11.70)  
45.96 (14.01)  
47.86 (14.59)  
49.77 (15.17)  
51.67 (15.75)  
53.58 (16.33)  
57.38 (17.49)  
66.90 (20.39)  
76.41 (23.29)  
89.70 (27.34)  
91.60 (27.92)  
95.41 (29.08)  
97.31 (29.66)  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
---------  
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
Printed in Japan  
0202-Y-CR-VP  
© 2002 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

InFocus Home Theater System SP LAMP 083 User Manual
Ingersoll Rand Heat Pump PE03P XDS XXX A0S User Manual
Iomega Thermometer DP18 RC User Manual
Jabra Headphones BT2050 User Manual
JAI Security Camera CV M7+ User Manual
JVC CRT Television C 13310 User Manual
JVC Home Theater System SP THD5C User Manual
JVC Speaker System FS SD990 User Manual
Kenwood Two Way Radio TK 3230 User Manual
Kodak DVD VCR Combo DVD755VR 05 User Manual